Auto lock cable lifter

ABSTRACT

A clamping device includes a rotatable element disposed between a jaw and a jaw support. The rotatable element has a slanting surface, interfacing a roller, and thus is configured to push the jaw toward an opposite jaw of the clamping device when rolling in a clamping direction. An auto lock mechanism is included in the clamping device, which can secure the rotating element for keeping the jaws separated. The auto lock mechanism can be activated or deactivated when the jaws are separated at a maximum or near maximum separation.

The present application is a continuation of U.S. patent applicationSer. No. 16/593,716, filed on Oct. 4, 2019, entitled “Auto lock cablelifter”, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,889,472, which claims priority from U.S.Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 62/741,555, filed on Oct. 5,2018, entitled “Auto lock cable lifter”, which are incorporated hereinby reference in their entirety.

The present invention relates to lifting devices. More particularly, itrelates to clamping devices for lifting and transferring objects such asmetal or ceramic plates.

BACKGROUND

In the heavy industry, large and heavy products can be difficult tohandle manually. Thus, a hoist connecting to a clamping device can beused to lift and move heavy objects. An object can be clamped to aclamping device that is coupled to a hoist. The hoist can lift theobject to a certain height, and then transfer to a proper location.

The clamping devices can utilize a mechanism that converts the weight ofthe object into a clamping force, thus the holding force on the objectexerted by the clamping devices can be proportional to the weight of theobject. A loading and unloading device, such as a crane or a hoist, canbe coupled to the clamping device for lifting and transferring theobjects.

A basic prior art clamping device can include a rotatable clamping jaw,which can rotate to change a spacing distance to a fixed clamping jaw.Rotation of the rotatable clamping jaw can enlarge or narrow thedistance between the two clamp jaws. For example, an object can beplaced between the two jaws from a bottom position, and the pushedupward toward the gap between the two jaws. The upward motion of theobject can cause a clockwise rotation of the rotatable clamping jaw,which can make the distance between the two jaws larger, to accommodatean object. After the object is placed between the two jaws, the weightof the object can cause the object to move downward. The downward motionof the object can cause a counterclockwise rotation of the rotatableclamping jaw, which can narrow the distance between the two jaws, or toexert a clamping force on the object.

FIG. 1A illustrates a prior art rotatable clamping device according tosome embodiments. A clamping device 100 can include a clamp body 110,which can house a fixed clamp jaw 130 and a rotatable clamp jaw 120. Thefixed clamp jaw and the rotatable clamp jaw can be configured to clampan object 160. The rotatable clamp jaw can have an offset center ofrotation 150, thus when the rotatable clamp jaw rotates counterclockwise, it comes closer to the fixed clamp jaw 130. That way theclamping device can support a number of sizes of objects. A spring 140can preload the rotatable clamp jaw, e.g., to push the rotatable clampjaw toward the fixed clamp jaw.

In operation, when the clamping device 100 is empty, e.g., when there isno object in the clamping device, the spring 140 pushes the rotatableclamp jaw counterclockwise toward the fixed clamp jaw, so there is nogap between the two jaws. An object 160 can be pushed in the clampingdevice, for example, upward to the space between the two jaws from abottom position. The pushing action can open the gap between the twojaws by rotating the rotatable clamp jaw clockwise.

Gravity then hold the object in place, e.g., when the object is pullingout of the clamping device, for example, in a downward direction, therotatable clamp jaw is rotated counterclockwise due to friction betweenthe object and the contact surface of the rotatable clamp jaw. Therotation exerts a force on the object, preventing the object from beingpulled out of the clamping device.

The rotatable clamping device can be compact and simple. But there canbe focused force at the rotatable clamp jaw, e.g., at the contact areaof the rotatable clamp jaw with the object. Thus the rotatable clampingdevice is not designed to handle heavy object, since heavy objectrequires a large clamping force, and the focused large clamping forcemight cause damage to the object.

Another prior art clamping device can include a gripping device normallyfabricated from structural steel components, that are designed tosecurely hold and lift construction materials though a scissor movement.The gripping device can use freely rotating pin connections to create ascissor configuration with two scissor arms.

A first end of the scissor arms is configured to rotate towards eachother in reaction to the opposite second end of the scissor arms beinglifted vertically. The first end of the scissor arms rotate inwards andgenerate a compression force clamping on the object to be lifted.Essentially, the weight of the object is used to generate this clampingaction.

FIG. 1B illustrates a prior art gripping device according to someembodiments.

A gripping device 105 can include two scissor arms 125 and 155, whichcan freely rotate about a pivot point 135. The scissor arms 125 and 155can include upper arms 121 and 151, together with lower arms 122 and152, respectively, connected through the freely rotating pivot 135.

The upper arms 121 and 151 can be coupled to pulling elements 141 and142, respectively. The coupling between the upper arms and the pullingelements can include freely rotating pin connections, e.g., the pullingelement 141/142 can be rotated relative to the upper arm 121/151. Thepulling elements 141 and 142 can be coupled to a lift 145, such as ahoist. The coupling between the pulling elements and the lift caninclude freely rotating pin connections, e.g., the pulling elements 141and 142 can be rotated relative to the lift 145.

The lower arms 122 and 152 can be coupled to holding pads 111 and 112,respectively. The coupling between the lower arms and the holding padscan include freely rotating pin connections, e.g., the holding pads111/112 can be rotated relative to the lower arm 122/152.

In operation, an object 165 is placed between the holding pads 111 and112. The lift 145 is pulled up, which pulls on the pulling elements 141and 142. The pulling elements 141 and 142 can in turn pull on the upperarms 121 and 151. The scissor movement between the upper arms 121/151and the lower arms 122/152 around the pivot point 135 can turn thepulling action on the upper arm 121/151 into a pressing action of thelower arm 122/152, which presses on the object 165 through the holdingpads 111 and 112.

Disadvantages of the gripper devices can include multiple operators forhandling. For example, when the empty gripper device is pulled up, theholding pads are pressed together. Thus when the empty gripper islowered to approach the object, another operator might need to bepresent to enlarge the holding pads for encompassing the object.

SUMMARY OF THE EMBODIMENTS

In some embodiments, the present invention discloses a clamping devicefor lifting and transferring objects. The clamping device can employslanting interfaces to convert a pulling action on the clamping deviceto a clamping action on the object.

The clamping device can include a jaw and a jaw assembly coupled to aclamp bar. The jaw assembly can include a second jaw and a jaw supportfacing each other. A rotating element can be disposed between the secondjaw and the jaw support. The rotating element can have a slantingsurface interfacing either the second jaw or the jaw support. Forexample, the rotating element can include a hollow cylinder with aslanting base, interfacing one or more rollers coupled to the second jawor to the jaw support. In this configuration, when the rotating elementrotates, the rollers can roll on the cylinder base, and can enlarge ornarrow the gap between the rollers and the rotating element, due to theslanting surface of the cylinder base. A pulling element, such as acable coupled to the rotating element, can be used to rotate therotating element in one direction. A spring can be used for rotating therotating element in an opposite direction. When the pulling element ispulled up, the rotating element rotates, which can exert a force on thejaw against the jaw support, for securing a gripping action on theobject.

In some embodiments, an auto lock mechanism can be included, which cansecure the rotating element for keeping the jaws separated. The autolock mechanism can be activated or deactivated when the jaws areseparated at a maximum distance. For example, an empty clamping devicecan have the auto lock mechanism activated to secure the jaws opened atthe maximum distance. After the clamping device is lowered to place anobject between the open jaws, the clamping device can contact the objectand deactivate the auto lock. The jaws are then free to move forclamping on the object when the clamping device pulls up. When theclamping device with the object is lowered to the ground, the jaws canbe open. When the jaws reach a maximum distance, the auto lock mechanismcan be activated, securing the jaws at the maximum separation. Theclamping mechanism can rise up, with the jaws remaining open.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIGS. 1A-1B illustrates a prior art devices according to someembodiments.

FIGS. 2A, 2B(a)-(c) and 2C illustrate clamping devices according to someembodiments.

FIGS. 3A-3C illustrate flow charts for forming and operating a clampingdevice according to some embodiments.

FIGS. 4A-4E illustrate clamping devices according to some embodiments.

FIGS. 5A-5B illustrate flow charts for forming and operating a clampingdevice according to some embodiments.

FIGS. 6A-6C illustrate a rotatable element having a slanting surfaceaccording to some embodiments.

FIGS. 7A-7C illustrate a rotatable element having a slanting surfaceaccording to some embodiments.

FIGS. 8A-8C illustrate a rotatable element having a slanting surfaceaccording to some embodiments.

FIGS. 9A-9C illustrate a rotatable element having a slanting surfaceaccording to some embodiments.

FIGS. 10A-10C illustrate flow charts for forming rotatable elementsaccording to some embodiments.

FIGS. 11A-11D illustrate a configuration of a clamping device accordingto some embodiments.

FIGS. 12A-12B illustrate flow charts for forming an operating a clampingdevice according to some embodiments.

FIGS. 13A-13D illustrate configurations for clamping devices with secure(locking) mechanisms according to some embodiments.

FIGS. 14A-14B illustrate a clamping device according to someembodiments.

FIGS. 15A-15B illustrate flow charts for forming and operating aclamping device according to some embodiments.

FIG. 16 illustrates a lock mechanism for a clamping device according tosome embodiments.

FIGS. 17A-17B illustrate configurations for a locking mechanismaccording to some embodiments.

FIGS. 18A-18B illustrate operating processes for the auto lock mechanismaccording to some embodiments.

FIGS. 19A-19I illustrate a process for the engagement and disengagementof a lock mechanism according to some embodiments.

FIGS. 20A-20E illustrate configurations for an auto lock mechanismaccording to some embodiments.

FIGS. 21A-21C illustrate flow charts for operating a clamping devicehaving an auto lock mechanism according to some embodiments.

FIGS. 22A-22B illustrate flow charts for operating a clamping devicehaving an auto lock mechanism according to some embodiments.

FIGS. 23A-23B illustrate flow charts for operating a clamping devicehaving an auto lock mechanism according to some embodiments.

FIGS. 24-26 illustrate additional views of the clamping device accordingto some embodiments.

FIGS. 27A-27F illustrate configurations of clamping devices according tosome embodiments.

FIGS. 28A-28D illustrate configurations of clamping devices having alocking mechanism according to some embodiments.

FIGS. 29A-29C illustrate a configuration of the locking mechanismaccording to some embodiments.

FIGS. 30A-30F illustrate configurations for clamping devices accordingto some embodiments.

FIGS. 31A-31D illustrate a schematic configuration for a lockingmechanism or assembly according to some embodiments.

FIGS. 32a-32l illustrate a toggle process from an unlocked state to alocked state according to some embodiments.

FIGS. 33a-33l illustrate a toggle process from a locked state to anunlocked state according to some embodiments.

FIGS. 34A-34D illustrate optimized configurations for the lockingassembly according to some embodiments.

FIGS. 35A-35E illustrate another schematic configuration for a lockingmechanism or assembly according to some embodiments.

FIGS. 36A-36C illustrate a toggle process from an unlocked state to alocked state according to some embodiments.

FIGS. 37A-37C illustrate a toggle process from a locked state to anunlocked state according to some embodiments.

FIGS. 38A-38D illustrate optimized configurations for the lockingassembly according to some embodiments.

FIGS. 39A-39C illustrate a locking feature of the hook end of a rod witha hookable feature of a hook receptacle according to some embodiments.

FIGS. 40A-40D illustrate a toggling configuration of the lockingmechanism according to some embodiments.

FIGS. 41A-41D illustrate another toggling configuration of the lockingmechanism according to some embodiments.

FIGS. 42A-42C illustrate flow charts for operating a locking mechanismaccording to some embodiments.

FIGS. 43A-43B illustrate flow charts for operating a locking mechanismaccording to some embodiments.

FIG. 44 illustrates a clamping device according to some embodiments.

FIGS. 45A-45B illustrate processes for operating a clamping deviceaccording to some embodiments.

FIG. 46 illustrates a clamping device according to some embodiments.

FIGS. 47A-47B illustrate processes for operating a clamping deviceaccording to some embodiments.

FIGS. 48A-48B illustrate a clamping device according to someembodiments.

FIGS. 49A-49B illustrate processes for operating a clamping deviceaccording to some embodiments.

FIGS. 50A-50B illustrate a clamping device according to someembodiments.

FIGS. 51A-51F illustrate another clamping device configuration accordingto some embodiments.

FIGS. 52A-52B illustrate processes for operating a clamping deviceaccording to some embodiments.

FIGS. 53A-53D illustrate a clamping device according to someembodiments.

FIGS. 54A-54B illustrate locking mechanisms for a clamping deviceaccording to some embodiments.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE EMBODIMENTS

In some embodiments, the present invention discloses a clamping devicefor lifting and/or transferring objects, such as metal, granite,ceramic, glass, quartz, or concrete plates. The clamping device caninclude two jaws facing each other for clamping on the object.

The clamping device can use a slanting surface to convert the weight ofthe object into a compression force for clamping and holding the object.The slanting surface can provide a high ratio of force transfer. Due tothe high conversion ratio, the clamping devices using slanting surfacecan be compact for lifting and transferring heavy objects.

The clamping device can include an auto lock mechanism that can keep thejaws open when needed, e.g., the auto lock mechanism, when activate, cankeep the jaws separated, for example, at a maximum separation. Thisactivation can allow the clamping device to release the object and toposition the object between the open jaws. When the auto lock mechanismis deactivated, the jaws can move to clamp on the object, to allowlifting and moving the object.

In some embodiments, a clamping device can include two jaw assembliescoupled to a clamp bar, e.g., a connection element. The jaw assembliescan be disposed away and facing each other. Each jaw assembly caninclude a jaw for clamping on an object. A jaw assembly can includeother components, such as a high friction pad, e.g., a rubber pad withhigh surface area pattern, coupled to a surface of the jaw for holdingthe object. The jaw assembly can be coupled to the clamp bar through thejaw, e.g., it is the jaw that is coupled to the clamp bar, and the othercomponents, such as the rubber pad, can be coupled to the jaw.

A jaw assembly can include a jaw support, in addition to the jaw andoptionally the rubber pad. The jaw assembly can be coupled to the clampbar through the jaw support, e.g., it is the jaw support that is coupledto the clamp bar, and the other components, such as the jaw, can becoupled to the jaw support. The other components can be coupled to thecomponents that are coupled to the jaw support, such as the rubber padis coupled to the jaw.

In some embodiments, there are two jaw supports coupled to the clampbar. The clamping device thus can include a first jaw assembly having afirst jaw and a first rubber pad coupled to the first jaw support, and asecond jaw assembly having a second jaw and a second rubber pad coupledto the second jaw support.

In some embodiments, there are one first jaw coupled to the clamp bar,and one jaw support coupled to the clamp bar. The clamping device thuscan include a first jaw assembly having the first jaw and a first rubberpad. The first jaw can be coupled to the clamp bar. The clamping devicecan include a second jaw assembly having a second jaw and a secondrubber pad which are coupled to the jaw support. The jaw support can becoupled to the clamp bar.

The jaw assemblies can be fixedly coupled to the clamp bar, or can bemovably coupled to the clamp bar. If movably coupled to the clamp bar,the jaw assemblies can be secured, e.g., fixedly coupled to the clampbar when secured, and movable when unsecured. The movable jaw assembliescan be used to adjust a distance between the jaws for accommodatingdifferent sizes of the object to be clamped and lifted. After the objectis placed between the jaws, e.g., after the opening between the jaws islarge enough to accommodate the object, the movable jaw assemblies canbe secured, e.g., fixedly coupled to the clamp bar.

A secure mechanism can be used to secure the jaw assembly to the clampbar. For example, if the jaw assembly does not have a jaw support, thejaw of the jaw assembly can be secured to the clamp bar through a securemechanism. If the jaw assembly has a jaw support, the jaw support can besecured to the clamp bar through a secure mechanism. There can be onesecure mechanism for a clamping device configuration having a fixed jawassembly and one movable jaw assembly. There can be two securemechanisms for a clamping device configuration having two movable jawassemblies.

In some embodiments, there are two jaw assemblies movably and securelycoupled to the clamp bar. For example, a first jaw assembly can includea first jaw having an opening in which the clamp bar can pass through.Thus the first jaw (and the first jaw assembly) can be movable along theclamp bar. A first secure (locking) mechanism can be included to securethe first jaw to the clamp bar, such as a latch or a spring-loadedlatch. The secure (locking) mechanism can be engaged, e.g., securing thejaw (and the jaw assembly) to the clamp bar, and/or disengaged, e.g.,releasing the jaw (and the jaw assembly) from the clamp bar so that thejaw (and the jaw assembly) can be freely movable along the clamp bar,with or without a key.

Alternatively, a first jaw assembly can include a first jaw coupled to afirst jaw support which has an opening in which the clamp bar can passthrough. Thus the first jaw support (and the first jaw assembly) can bemovable along the clamp bar. A first secure (locking) mechanism can beincluded to secure the first jaw support to the clamp bar, such as alatch or a spring-loaded latch. The secure (locking) mechanism can beengaged, e.g., securing the jaw support (and the jaw assembly) to theclamp bar, and/or disengaged, e.g., releasing the jaw support (and thejaw assembly) from the clamp bar so that the jaw support (and the jawassembly) can be freely movable along the clamp bar, with or without akey.

The second jaw assembly can be similarly constructed. For example, thesecond jaw assembly can include a second jaw having an opening in whichthe clamp bar can pass through and a second secure (locking) mechanismto secure the second jaw to the clamp bar. Alternatively, the second jawassembly can include a second jaw coupled to a jaw support which has anopening in which the clamp bar can pass through and a second secure(locking) mechanism to secure the second jaw support to the clamp bar.

In some embodiments, there are one first jaw assembly movably andsecurely coupled to the clamp bar and one second jaw assembly fixedlycoupled to the clamp bar. For example, a first jaw assembly can includea first jaw having an opening in which the clamp bar can pass through.Thus the first jaw (and the first jaw assembly) can be movable along theclamp bar. A first secure (locking) mechanism can be included to securethe first jaw to the clamp bar, such as a latch or a spring-loadedlatch. The secure (locking) mechanism can be engaged, e.g., securing thejaw (and the jaw assembly) to the clamp bar, and/or disengaged, e.g.,releasing the jaw (and the jaw assembly) from the clamp bar so that thejaw (and the jaw assembly) can be freely movable along the clamp bar,with or without a key.

Alternatively, a first jaw assembly can include a first jaw coupled to afirst jaw support which has having an opening in which the clamp bar canpass through. Thus the first jaw support (and the first jaw assembly)can be movable along the clamp bar. A first secure (locking) mechanismcan be included to secure the first jaw support to the clamp bar, suchas a latch or a spring-loaded latch. The secure (locking) mechanism canbe engaged, e.g., securing the jaw support (and the jaw assembly) to theclamp bar, and/or disengaged, e.g., releasing the jaw support (and thejaw assembly) from the clamp bar so that the jaw support (and the jawassembly) can be freely movable along the clamp bar, with or without akey.

The second jaw assembly can be fixedly coupled to the clamp bar. Forexample, the second jaw assembly can include a second jaw fixedlycoupled to the clamp bar. Alternatively, the second jaw assembly caninclude a second jaw coupled to a jaw support which is fixedly coupledto the clamp bar.

In some embodiments, there are two jaw assemblies fixedly coupled to theclamp bar. For example, a first jaw assembly can include a first jawwhich is fixedly coupled to the clamp bar, such as with a bolt set.Alternatively, the first jaw assembly can include a first jaw coupled toa first jaw support which is fixedly coupled to the clamp bar.Similarly, the second jaw assembly can include a second jaw which isfixedly coupled to the clamp bar. Alternatively, the second jaw assemblycan include a second jaw coupled to a second jaw support which isfixedly coupled to the clamp bar.

In some embodiments, the clamp bar can include a connection bar having around or substantially rectangular cross section, such as a rectangularshape with rounded corners. The connection bar can be large enough sothat a fixed jaw assembly can be secured to. The connection bar can alsobe configured to let a movable jaw assembly pass through for movingalong the clamp bar.

In some embodiments, the clamp bar can include multiple connection bars,such as multiple round rods or polygon rods. Each connection bar can besecured to a fixed jaw assembly with bolts, for example, at one end ofthe connection bar. The multiple connection bars can be distributed toprovide structural support to the jaw assemblies.

In some embodiments, the clamping device can use a slanting surface toconvert the weight of the object into a compression force for clampingand holding the object. The slanting surface can provide a high ratio offorce transfer. Due to the high conversion ratio, the clamping devicesusing slanting surface can be compact for lifting and transferring heavyobjects.

A slanting interface can be included in a jaw assembly, for example,between a jaw and a jaw support, or between the jaw support (or the jaw)and another component of the clamping device. When a hoist coupled to aclamping device is pulling upward, the upward force can be converted toa side force due to the slanting interface. Alternatively, when anobject is sliding down from the clamping device, the weight of theobject can be converted to the side force due to the slanting interface.The side force can press on the jaw of the jaw assembly for clamping onthe object, preventing the object from being released or slide ordropped from the clamping device.

The clamping device can have one slanting interface, e.g., a first jawassembly having the slanting interface and a second jaw assembly withouta slanting interface. Alternatively, the clamping device can have twoslanting interfaces, e.g., a first jaw assembly having two slantinginterfaces, or a first jaw assembly having a first slanting interfaceand a second jaw assembly having a second slanting interface.

FIGS. 2A, 2B(a)-(c) and 2C illustrate clamping devices according to someembodiments. The clamping devices can have compact sizes for handleheavy objects by using slanting interfaces.

FIG. 2A shows a clamping device 200 having a sliding slanting interface280 in a jaw assembly. A clamping device 200 can include a jaw and a jawassembly, with both coupled to a clamp bar. The jaw assembly can includea jaw 281 and a jaw support 282. Other configurations can be used, suchas a clamping device having two jaw assemblies.

The jaw assembly can include a sliding slanting interface 280, which caninclude a planar slanting surface on the jaw 281, mating with a slantingsurface on the jaw support 282. At the slanting interface 280, thesecond jaw 281 can move relative to the jaw support 282 along theslanting interface.

When the object clamped between the two jaws starts to move down due togravity, the object can cause the jaw 281 to also start to move down dueto a friction between the object and the second jaw. Alternatively, whenthe clamping device 200 starts to move up for lifting the object, thejaw support 282 can move up.

The slanting interface 280 can be configured so that when the jaw 281starts to move down 283 (or when the jaw support 282 starts to move up),the jaw 281 can also start to move away 284 from the jaw support sincethe jaw support is secured to the clamp bar. The potential side movementof the second jaw can exert a force on the object, preventing the objectfrom moving down, e.g., to clamp the object in place.

The slanting interface can be configured so that the jaw 281 can movetoward the object when the jaw 281 is moving down. Thus, if there is noobstacle blocking the movement of the jaw, e.g., the object is notpresent or the object is not in contact with the jaw, the jaw is movingtoward the object when the jaw is moving downward.

The slanting interface can be configured so that when there is adownward force 283 acting on the jaw 281, the downward force can beconverted to a sideward force 284 toward the object. The downward forcecan be a force in any direction having a force component in a downwarddirection. The conversion of the downward force can be viewed as adecomposition or a splitting of the downward force into multiple forcecomponents, in which a force component has a sideward direction. Thus,if there is no obstacle blocking the movement of the jaw, e.g., theobject is not present or the object is not in contact with the jaw, thejaw is moving toward the object (in addition to the jaw moving down)when there is a downward force acting on the jaw. If there is anobstacle blocking the movement of the jaw, e.g., the object is incontact with the jaw, there is a sideward force from the jaw pressing onthe object.

The slanting interface can include a slanting surface making an acuteangle with a vertical plane with a top portion of the slanting surfaceaway from the object more than a bottom portion of the slanting surface.The slanting surface can be tilted toward the object at a bottomportion, or tilted away from the object at a top portion.

The slanting interface can have a low friction surface, e.g., lower thanthe friction between the object and the jaw 281. For example, the jawscan include a rubber layer facing the object, which can have highfriction with the object.

In some embodiments, the downward direction means the direction of thegravity. An upward direction means an opposite direction of the downwarddirection. A top portion can mean a portion in an upward direction, inopposite direction to a bottom portion, which can mean a portion in adownward direction.

A sideward direction means a horizontal direction, e.g., a directionperpendicular to the downward direction. Since the clamping device isconfigured to clamp, lift and transfer objects, the object exerts adownward force on the clamping device due to gravity, or the clampingdevice exerts an upward force on the object for lifting the object.

FIG. 2B (a)-(c) show a clamping device 201 having a rotating slantinginterface in a jaw assembly 240. A clamping device 201 can include twojaw assemblies 240 and 260 coupled to a clamp bar 250. The jaw assemblycan include a jaw, or a jaw and a jaw support. As shown, the jawassembly 260 includes a jaw 261. And the jaw assembly 240 includes a jaw241 and a jaw support 242.

The jaw assembly can be fixedly coupled to the clamp bar, or can bemovably and securably (or lockably) coupled to the clamp bar, using anoptional secure (locking) mechanism. As shown, the jaw assemblies 260and 240 are fixedly coupled to the clamp bar 250 by the jaw 261 and thejaw support 242. Alternatively, the jaw assemblies can be movablycoupled to the clamp bar, such as the jaw assembly 240 can be movablycoupled to the clamp bar 250. For movable jaw assemblies, secure(locking) mechanisms, such as latch mechanisms, can be included forsecuring the jaw assemblies to the clamp bar.

The jaw assemblies 240 and 260 each can include a jaw for clamping on anobject 210. For example, the jaw assembly 260 can include a first jaw261. The jaw assembly 240 can include a second jaw 241, which togetherwith the first jaw 261, pressing on the object 210 for clamping theobject. The jaw assemblies can be fixedly coupled to the clamp bar. Forexample, the jaw assembly 260 can be fixedly coupled to the clamp bar250 by securing the first jaw 261 with the clamp bar 250. The jawassemblies can be movable along to the clamp bar, e.g., to accommodatedifferent sizes of the object. Once the jaw opening between the jaws 241and 261 is large enough to clamp on the object 210, the jaw support 240can then be fixed to the clamp bar 250. For example, the jaw assembly240 can be movable along the clamp bar 250 by sliding the jaw support242 along the clamp bar 250. A secure (locking) mechanism 220 can beincluded to lock, e.g., to secure, the jaw assembly 240 to the clamp bar250, for example, by latching the jaw support 242 to the clamp bar 250.

The jaw assembly 240 can include a rotating slanting interface 271,which can include a slanting surface on the second jaw 241, mating witha slanting surface on the jaw support 242. At the slanting interface271, e.g., at the mated slanting surfaces of the second jaw 241 and thejaw support 242, the second jaw 241 can move relative to the jaw support242 along the slanting interface.

A cable 243 can be coupled to the second jaw 241 to rotate the secondjaw. When the cable is lifted up to move the clamping device up, thesecond jaw can rotate to change a distance with the jaw support, or toexert a force of the object. A spring mechanism can be included torotate the second jaw in the opposite direction.

The rotating slanting interface 271 can be configured so that when thesecond jaw 241 starts to rotate 273, the second jaw can also start tomove away 274 from the jaw support since the jaw support is secured tothe clamp bar. The potential side movement of the second jaw can exert aforce on the object, preventing the object from moving down, e.g., toclamp the object in place.

The slanting interface can be configured so that the second jaw 241 canmove toward the object 210 when the second jaw 241 is moving down. Thus,if there is no obstacle blocking the movement of the second jaw, e.g.,the object is not present or the object is not in contact with thesecond jaw, the second jaw is moving toward the object when the secondjaw is rotating.

The slanting interface can be configured so that when there is arotating force 273 acting on the second jaw 241, the rotating force canbe converted to a sideward force 274 toward the object. The rotatingforce can be activated in one direction, e.g., the up direction forlifting the clamping device, by a cable. The rotating force can beactivated in an opposite direction, e.g., the down direction whenlowering the clamping device, by a spring mechanism. Thus, if there isno obstacle blocking the movement of the second jaw, e.g., the object isnot present or the object is not in contact with the second jaw, thesecond jaw is moving toward the object (in addition to the second jawrotating) when there is a rotating force acting on the second jaw. Ifthere is an obstacle blocking the movement of the second jaw, e.g., theobject is in contact with the second jaw, there is a sideward force fromthe second jaw pressing on the object.

The rotating slanting interface can include a curve slanting surfacemaking a rotating acute angle with a vertical plane with a top portionof the slanting surface away from the object more than a bottom portionof the slanting surface. The slanting surface can be tilted toward theobject at a bottom portion, or tilted away from the object at a topportion.

The slanting interface can have a low friction surface, e.g., lower thanthe friction between the object 210 and the second jaw 241.

In some embodiments, the rotating direction can be clockwise orcounterclockwise. One rotating direction can cause the rotating jaw tofurther separate from the jaw support. An opposite direction can causethe rotating jaw to move closer to the jaw support. A downward directionmeans the direction of the gravity. An upward direction means anopposite direction of the downward direction. A top portion can mean aportion in an upward direction, in opposite direction to a bottomportion, which can mean a portion in a downward direction.

A sideward direction means a horizontal direction, e.g., a directionperpendicular to the downward direction. Since the clamping device isconfigured to clamp, lift and transfer objects, the object exerts adownward force on the clamping device due to gravity, or the clampingdevice exerts an upward force on the object for lifting the object.

In operation, the object is first clamped between the jaws 261 and 241of the clamping device. For clamping device with a movable jaw assembly,the secure (locking) mechanism of the movable jaw assembly can bedisengaged, so that the movable jaw assembly is free to move along theclamp bar. The movable jaw assembly can be moving away from the jawassembly to enlarge the opening between the two jaws. Once the openingis large enough to accommodate the object, the object can be placedbetween the jaws. The movable jaw assembly can then be moving toward theobject so that the object is in contact with the jaws, or so that thereis a minimum gap between the object and the jaws. The movable jawassembly then can be secured to the clamp bar, for example, by engagingthe secure (locking) mechanism.

There can be a gap 222 (FIG. 2B (b)) between the object and the jaws,e.g., the opening of the jaws of the clamping device configuration canbe larger than the size of the object for ease of accepting the object.For example, a clamping device with fixed jaw assemblies can be selectedto meet the object sizes. Alternatively, for clamping devices with fixedjaw assemblies, a secure (locking) mechanism can secure the movable jawassembly to the clamp bar at discrete locations, and the engagablelocations for the current object do not allow the object to be incontact. The location to engage the secure (locking) mechanism can beselected to cover a range of object thicknesses, e.g., a range that themovement of the rotating jaw can achieve for clamping on the object. Thelocation to engage the secure (locking) mechanism can be selected toensure a minimum gap between the object and the jaws, meaning thedistance between the object and the first and second jaw is smaller thanthe distance between two successive locking locations of the secure(locking) mechanism. The minimum gap can be achieved by moving themovable jaw assembly in a direction of narrowing the gap until themovable jaw assembly reaches the object, e.g., until the object is incontact with the jaws. The movable jaw assembly is then backed up, e.g.,moving in an opposite direction of enlarging the gap, until reaching thefirst engagable location for the secure (locking) mechanism.

After placing the object between the jaws and securing or locking thejaw assembly, one or both jaws can be adjusted, so that the jaws are incontact with the object. For example, the object can be positioned ormoved so that it is in contact with the first jaw 261 (e.g., the jaw ofthe jaw assembly that cannot be moved), leaving a gap only between theobject and the second jaw 241 (e.g., the jaw of the movable jawassembly). Then the hoist coupled to the cable can move up, pulling onthe cable to rotate the rotating element. When the rotating elementrotates, the second jaw moves 223 toward the object (FIG. 2A (c)) due tothe slanting interface, until the object is in contact with the secondjaw.

After the jaws are adjusted, e.g., the jaws are in contact with theobject, the hoist can continue to be lifted up, lifting the cable andthe clamping device. The weight of the object can exert a rotating forceon the rotating element, which can be converted to a sideward force 274toward the object. The sideward force 274 can exert a force on theobject, holding the object in place, preventing the object from goingdown, e.g., slipping out of the jaws.

Advantages of the clamping device using the slanting interface caninclude compact size, since the clamping device includes two oppositejaw assemblies connected by a clamp bar. Further, the force clamping onthe object can be well distributed throughout the surface of the jaws,meaning no focused point.

Further, the contact surfaces of the clamping device with the object canbe scalable, meaning large size jaw pads can be used to accommodateheavy objects. Together with evenly distributed force, the clampingdevice can be gentle on the object, meaning the clamping device can beused on heavy fragile objects, such as granite, glass or ceramic plates.

FIG. 2C shows another configuration for a clamping device, having twoslanting interfaces in two jaw assemblies. A clamping device 205 caninclude two jaw assemblies 245 and 265 coupled to a clamp bar 255. Thejaw assembly 265 includes a jaw 266 and a jaw support 267, together witha first slanting interface there between. And the jaw assembly 245includes a jaw 246 and a jaw support 247, together with a secondslanting interface there between. A first secure (locking) mechanism 225can be used to secure the jaw assembly 265 to the clamp bar. A secondsecure (locking) mechanism 275 can be used to secure the jaw assembly245 to the clamp bar.

With two jaw support assemblies, the object can be symmetricallyoriented, thus the two jaws 246 and 266 can be pulling down together bythe weight of the object. The two jaws then can be sliding toward theobject, due to the slanting interfaces, and exerting forces on theobject, keeping the object in place and preventing the object frommoving out of the clamp device.

In some embodiments, the components of the clamping devices 200 and 205,such as the jaw supports 242, 247 and/or 267, the jaws 241, 261, 246,and/or 267, the clamp bars 250 and/or 255, can include a metal coreembedded in a different material. The construction of the componentsusing metal cores can be simpler and more cost effective while meetingthe requirements of strength, hardness, durability and reliability.

FIGS. 3A-3C illustrate flow charts for forming and operating a clampingdevice according to some embodiments. In FIG. 3A, operation 300 forms aclamping device. The clamping device can include a jaw and a jawsupport. The jaw and the jaw support can be coupled with a slantingsurface. The slanting surface can be configured so that when a rotatableelement coupled to a jaw of the clamping device rotates, the jaw movestoward an object. The slanting surface can also be configured so thatwhen there is a force comprising a downward direction acting on therotatable element, there is a force comprising a sideward directionacting toward an object to be clamped by the clamping device.

In FIG. 3B, operation 320 forms a clamping device. The clamping devicecan include a clamp bar, a first jaw fixedly coupled to the clamp bar,and a jaw assembly movably and securely coupled to the clamp bar. Thejaw assembly can include a second jaw and a jaw support. The second jawand the jaw support is coupled with a slanting surface. The slantingsurface can be configured so that when a rotatable element coupled tothe second jaw of the clamping device rotates, the second jaw movestoward an object supported between the first and second jaw for keepingthe object in place. The slanting surface can also be configured so thatwhen there is a force comprising a downward direction acting on thesecond jaw, there is a force comprising a sideward direction actingtoward the object.

In FIG. 3C, operation 340 places an object between a first jaw and asecond jaw of a clamping device. The second jaw can be coupled to a jawsupport with a slanting surface. The slanting interface can beconfigured so that when a rotatable element coupled to the second jawrotates, the rotation makes the second jaw moving toward the object forkeeping the object in place.

The first and second jaws can be directly or indirectly coupled to aclamp bar. For example, the first jaw can be directly coupled to theclamp bar. The second jaw can be indirectly coupled to the clamp bar,e.g., the second jaw is coupled to jaw support while the jaw support isdirectly coupled to the clamp bar.

If the opening between the first jaw and the second jaw is not enough toaccommodate the object, the first jaw, the second jaw, or the jawsupport can be move along the clamp bar to enlarge the opening distance.

After placing the object between the jaws, the opening can be narrowedso that the object is in contact with the jaws, or there is a minimumgap between the object and the jaws. The first jaw, the second jaw, orthe jaw support then can be securely coupled to the clamp bar.

If there is a gap between the object and the jaws, one or two jaws canbe adjusted, e.g., changing the positions of the jaws or moving thejaws, so that the jaws can contact the object. For example, a hoist canlift a cable coupled to the rotatable element, which can rotate therotatable element and moves the second jaw toward the object. The hoistcan lift the cable until the jaws are in contact with the object.

Operation 350 lifts the clamping device, e.g., continuing lifting thecable, to move the object.

In some embodiments, the clamping device can include a pulling element,which is coupled to the rotatable element which is coupled to the secondjaw. For example, the pulling element can be a flexible line, such as acable, a wire, a string, a cord, a rope, or a chain wrapping around therotatable element. The flexible line can include a metal component, suchas metallic or alloy flexible line (e.g., a cable, a wire, a string, acord, a rope, or a chain), or a flexible line having a metallic or alloybackbone for additional strength. Throughout the present description,the term “cable” or “chain” can mean flexible line, such asnon-metallic, metallic, or alloy flexible line. A free end of thepulling element can be coupled to a hoist, for lifting the pullingelement and also the clamping device.

A slanting interface can be included between the rotatable element andat least one of the jaw and the jaw support. For example, there can be aslanting interface between the rotatable element and the jaw support.There can be a second slanting interface between the rotatable elementand the jaw. The rotatable element can simplify the operation of theclamping device, for example, by eliminating the adjustment of the jaws,e.g., moving the jaws so that the jaws can be in contact with the objectif there are gaps between the jaws and the object after the jawassemblies are secured to the clamp bar.

By pulling on the pulling element, when there is a gap, the jaw willmove toward the object to narrow the gap. After the jaws are in contactwith the object, further pulling action will exert a force from the jawsto the object, clamping the object in place. The clamping force can beevenly distributed at the clamping jaws.

Further, the pulling element can improve the clamping force on theobject, for example, due to the wedging configuration of the jaw and thejaw support. The high clamping force can improve the gripping action ofthe clamping device on the object, further preventing the object fromslipping out of the jaws of the clamping device.

In some embodiments, the clamping device can include a spring assemblywhich is configured to rotate the rotatable element in an oppositedirection, e.g., in the opposite direction of the direction that thepulling element, e.g., the flexible line, can exert on the rotatableelement when the flexible line is pulled. For example, if the flexibleline is wrapped around the rotatable element in a clockwise direction,pulling on the flexible line can cause the rotatable element to rotatein a counterclockwise direction.

The spring assembly can be configured so that when the flexible line isrelaxed, e.g., when the pulling force on the flexible line is less thanthe force of the spring assembly, the spring assembly can cause therotatable element to rotate in the clockwise direction, e.g., oppositeto the counterclockwise direction that the flexible line can exert onthe rotatable element.

In some embodiments, the present invention discloses a clamping devicefor lifting and/or for transferring heavy objects, such as graniteplates, cement blocks, metal plates, and objects of other shapes andmaterials. The clamping device can grip the objects by clamping onportions of the objects, such as at edges of the objects.

The present clamping device can lift an object, or multiple objectsplacing next to each other, such as lifting a plate or a stack ofmultiple plates. The clamping device can be used for lifting heavyplates with large thicknesses without damaging the lifted plates, suchas without deforming or cracking the plates. The center of the clampingaction can be evenly distributed to the clamping jaws, to provide aneven clamping force on the objects.

Further, the clamping device can be compact and light weight, e.g.,which can include two jaw assemblies coupled to a clamp bar. The smallsize of the clamping device can allow the clamping device to be placedin the gaps of multiple objects to clamp on the selected object. Forexample, multiple heavy plates can be stacked against each other in afacility with small gaps in between. The clamping device can be placedat the gaps, and enclosing the plate to be clamped.

The small size and light weight of the clamping device can allow theclamping device to easily move along the object, for example, so thatthe clamping device can clamp on a vertical line with the center ofgravity of the object. The alignment of the clamping device with thecenter of gravity can prevent excessive tilting of the object whenlifted.

FIGS. 4A-4E illustrate clamping devices according to some embodiments.In FIG. 4A, a clamping device 400 can have a solid pulling element. Theclamping device can include a jaw and a jaw assembly coupled to a clampbar. The jaw assembly can include a jaw 481 and a jaw support 482.

A pulling element 485 can be disposed between the jaw 481 and the jawsupport 482. The pulling element can be loosely coupled to the clampbar. For example, the pulling element can include a hollow space, suchas a through hole, in which the clamp bar can pass through. The hollowspace can be larger than the cross section of the clamp bar, so that thepulling element can move relative to the clamp bar.

Alternatively, the clamp bar between the two jaw assemblies, e.g., theconnection element between the two jaw assemblies, can include oneconnection bar or multiple connection bars. The multiple connection barscan be secured to the jaw assemblies, and the pulling element can bedisposed between the connection bars.

In some embodiments, the pulling element can be constrained to preventsideward movements, e.g., the pulling element can move in the up anddown directions, e.g., in the directions of gravity and in thedirections along the clamp bar. Thus the hollow space of the pullingelement can be larger above and below the clamping bar, to allow thepulling element to move up and down with respect to the clamp bar. Thehollow space can be close to the clamp bar at sides, such as in contactor having a small gap. The closeness of the pulling element and theclamp bar in sideward directions, e.g., in directions perpendicular tothe gravity directions, can constrain the pulling element from moving inthe sideward directions. Similarly, the multiple clamp bar configurationwith the pulling element disposed between the clamp bars can allow thepulling element to move freely in directions except the sidewarddirections.

There can be slanting interfaces between the pulling element and the jawassembly in which the pulling element is disposed within. There can beone or two slanting interfaces. For example, slanting interface 480A canbe between the pulling element 485 and the jaw 481. Slanting interface480B can be between the pulling element 485 and the jaw support 482.There can be two slanting interfaces, or there can be one slantinginterface, with the other interface being a non-slanting interface,e.g., a vertical surface or a tilted surface sloped in an oppositedirection as the slanting interface. As shown, the pulling element canmove up and down along the slanting interfaces 480A and 480B.

The slanting interfaces can be configured so that when the pullingelement moves up, e.g., in a direction for lifting the object, the jawcan move in a direction that increases a separation between the jaw andthe jaw support. For example, a bottom portion of the pulling element,e.g., a dimension of the pulling element at the bottom portion in adirection between the jaw and the jaw support, can be larger than a topportion of the pulling element, e.g., a dimension of the pulling elementat a top portion in a direction between the jaw and the jaw support, ora dimension of the pulling element at a portion above the dimension ofthe pulling element at a top portion, in a direction between the jaw andthe jaw support.

That way, when the pulling element moves up, the larger bottom portionalso moves up, further separating the jaw and the jaw support. Theslanting interface between the pulling element and the jaw support canprovide that the corresponding bottom portion of the jaw support can besmaller than the corresponding top portion of the jaw support. Theslanting interface between the pulling element and the jaw can providethat the corresponding bottom portion of the jaw can be smaller than thecorresponding top portion of the jaw.

In some embodiments, the slanting interfaces can be provided at aportion of the surface that the pulling element is facing the jaw or thejaw support. Thus a bottom portion or a top portion of the pullingelement can be only a portion of the interface between the pullingelement and the jaw/jaw support.

The slanting interfaces 480A and 480B can be configured so that when thepulling element 485 starts to move up, the pulling element can movealong the slanting interfaces. With the slanting interfaces, the jaw 481can also start to move away 484 from the jaw support. The potential sidemovement of the second jaw can exert a force on the object, preventingthe object from moving down, e.g., to clamp the object in place.

The slanting interface can be configured so that the second jaw can bemoving toward the object when the pulling element is moving up. Thus, ifthere is no obstacle blocking the movement of the second jaw, e.g., theobject is not present or the object is not in contact with the secondjaw, the second jaw is moving toward the object or away from the jawsupport when the pulling element is moving upward.

The slanting interface can be configured so that when there is an upwardforce acting on the pulling element, there is an upward force (e.g., aforce having a component in the upward direction) along the slantinginterfaces. The upward force can be converted to a sideward force towardthe object. The conversion of the upward force can be viewed as adecomposition or a splitting of the upward force into multiple forcecomponents, in which a force component has a sideward direction. Thus,if there is no obstacle blocking the movement of the jaw, e.g., theobject is not present or the object is not in contact with the jaw, thejaw is moving toward the object (in addition to the jaw potentiallymoving down) when there is the upward force acting on the pullingelement. If there is an obstacle blocking the movement of the jaw, e.g.,the object is in contact with the jaw, there is a sideward force fromthe jaw pressing on the object.

In FIG. 4B, a clamping device 401 can include a flexible line as apulling element. The clamping device can include two jaw assemblies 440and 460 coupled to a clamp bar 450. The jaw assembly can include a jaw,or a jaw and a jaw support. As shown, the jaw assembly 460 includes ajaw 461. And the jaw assembly 440 includes a jaw 441 and a jaw support442.

The jaw assembly can be fixedly coupled to the clamp bar, or can bemovably and securably (or lockably) coupled to the clamp bar, using anoptional secure (locking) mechanism. As shown, the jaw assembly 460 ismovably coupled to the clamp bar 450, together with a secure (locking)mechanism 421 for securing the jaw assembly 460 to the clamp bar 450.And the jaw assembly 440 is movably coupled to the clamp bar 450,together with a secure (locking) mechanism 420 for securing the jawassembly 440 to the clamp bar 450.

The jaw assemblies 440 and 460 each can include a jaw for clamping on anobject 410. For example, the jaw assembly 460 can include a first jaw461. The jaw assembly 440 can include a second jaw 441, which togetherwith the first jaw 461, pressing on the object 410 for clamping theobject. The jaw assemblies can be fixedly or movably coupled to theclamp bar. For example, the jaw assembly 460 can be movably coupled tothe clamp bar 450 by the first jaw 461 movably along the clamp bar 450.The jaw 461 can be secured to the clamp bar by the secure (locking)mechanism 421, for example, through a latching mechanism that latchesthe jaw 461 to the clamp bar 450.

The jaw assemblies can be movable along to the clamp bar, e.g., toaccommodate different ranges of sizes of the object. Once the jawopening between the jaws 441 and 461 is large enough to clamp on theobject 410, the jaw support 440 can then be fixed to the clamp bar 450.For example, the jaw assembly 440 can be movable along the clamp bar 450by sliding the jaw support 442 along the clamp bar 450. A secure(locking) mechanism 420 can be included to lock, e.g., to secure, thejaw assembly 440 to the clamp bar 450, for example, by latching the jawsupport 442 to the clamp bar 450.

A rotatable element 430 can be disposed between the jaw 441 and the jawsupport 442 of the jaw assembly 440. The rotatable element can becoupled to the second jaw or to the jaw support. For example, therotatable element can be coupled to the jaw support through a set ofbearing 444 (see FIG. 4D(b)), which can allow the rotatable element torotate relative to the jaw support.

There can be slanting interfaces between the rotatable element and thejaw assembly in which the rotatable element is disposed within. Forexample, slanting interface 471 can be between the rotatable element 430and the jaw 441. The slanting interface can include a tilted surface,which can be configured to change a relative distance between therotatable element and the second jaw (or the jaw support if therotatable element is coupled to the second jaw). As shown, the rotatableelement is coupled to the jaw support and can rotate to push or pull thesecond jaw.

The slanting interfaces can be configured so that when the rotatableelement rotates, e.g., in a direction 472 caused by lifting a pullingelement 443 such as a cable or a chain, the jaw can move in a directionthat increases a separation between the jaw and the jaw support. Forexample, the rotatable element 430 can include a cylinder having atilted base 435. Thus, then the cylinder rotates, the tilted base alsorotates, to push a mating surface of the second jaw away. That way, whenthe pulling element moves up, the rotatable element rotates to furtherseparate the jaw and the jaw support.

In some embodiments, the slanting interfaces can be provided at aportion of the surface that the pulling element is facing the jaw or thejaw support.

The slanting interface 471 can be configured so that when the rotatableelement 430 starts to rotate 472, the jaw 441 can also start to moveaway 474 from the jaw support since the jaw support is secured to theclamp bar by the secure (locking) mechanism 420. The potential sidemovement of the second jaw can exert a force on the object, preventingthe object from moving down, e.g., to clamp the object in place.

The slanting interface can be configured so that the second jaw 441 canbe moving toward the object 410 when the rotatable element 430 isrotating. Thus, if there is no obstacle blocking the movement of thesecond jaw, e.g., the object is not present or the object is not incontact with the second jaw, the second jaw is moving toward the objector away from the jaw support when the rotatable element is rotating inone direction.

The slanting interface can be configured so that when there is an upwardforce 433 acting on the pulling element 443, there is a torque acting onthe rotatable element 430, which results in a sideward force 474 towardthe object. Thus, if there is no obstacle blocking the movement of thejaw, e.g., the object is not present or the object is not in contactwith the jaw, the jaw is moving toward the object (in addition to thejaw potentially moving down) when there is the upward force acting onthe pulling element. If there is an obstacle blocking the movement ofthe jaw, e.g., the object is in contact with the jaw, there is asideward force from the jaw pressing on the object.

The slanting interface can have a low friction surface, e.g., lower thanthe friction between the object 410 and the jaws 461 and 441. Forexample, the jaws 461 and 441 can include a rubber layer facing theobject, which can have high friction toward the object.

There can be one or two slanting interfaces.

A spring assembly 445 can be coupled to the rotatable element. Thespring assembly can be tensioned as to rotate the rotatable element in adirection opposite to direction 472, e.g., opposite to the direction ofrotation of the rotatable element when the pulling element is pulled up.The tensioned spring assembly thus can rotate the rotatable assemblywhen there is no tension or when there is less tension in the pullingelement, for example, when the pulling element is relaxed, not beingpulled up.

In operation, the object is first clamped between the jaws 461 and 441of the clamping device. For example, the secure (locking) mechanism 421can be engaged to secure the jaw 461 to the clamp bar 450. The secure(locking) mechanism 420 can be disengaged, so that the jaw support 442is free to move along the clamp bar 450. The jaw assembly 440 can bemoving away from the jaw assembly 460 to enlarge the opening between thejaw 461 and 441. Once the opening is large enough to accommodate theobject, the object can be placed between the jaws. The jaw assembly 440can then be moving toward the object so that the object is in contactwith the jaws, or so that there is a minimum gap between the object andthe jaws. The jaw assembly 440 then can be secured to the clamp bar, forexample, by engaging the secure (locking) mechanism 420.

Alternatively, the jaw assembly 440 can be locked first, and the jawassembly 460 can be adjusted to ensure a minimum gap between the objectand the jaws.

There can be a gap 422 between the object and the jaws, if the secure(locking) mechanism 420 is a discrete secure (locking) mechanism, e.g.,the secure (locking) mechanism can secure the jaw assembly 440 to theclamp bar 450 at discrete locations, and the engagable locations for thecurrent object do not allow the object to be in contact. The location toengage the secure (locking) mechanism can be selected to ensure aminimum gap between the object and the jaws, meaning the total gapbetween the object and the first jaw and between the object and thesecond jaw is smaller than the distance between two successive lockinglocations of the secure (locking) mechanism.

After placing the object between the jaws and secure the jaw assemblies,the pulling element can be pulled up. For example, the pulling elementcan be coupled to a hoist, and the hoist can move upward. The upwardmovement 423 of the pulling element can rotate the rotatable element,which can push the jaw 441 toward the object, closing the gap 422 untilthe jaw 441 is in contact with the object. A slow upward pulling of thepulling element can be applied when the jaws are not yet in contact withthe object, so that the object does not escape the clamping element.

After the jaws clamp on the object, the pulling element, e.g., throughthe hoist, can be further pulled up to lift the object. The hoist thencan move and transfer the object to a new location.

Additional advantages of the clamping device having a pulling elementinclude that the jaw can be fixed in location with respect to theobject, meaning the pulling element can move to press on the jaw withoutthe need to move the jaw. A further advantage of the clamping devicehaving a pulling element is a high transfer coefficient between theupward force of the pulling element and the sideward force of the jaw onthe object.

In some embodiments, in a jaw assembly, the jaw and the jaw support canbe flexibly coupled, e.g., there can be limited movements of the jawrelative to the jaw support. For example, the jaw can include hollowspaces, such as through holes. One or more rods or bars can pass throughthe hollow spaces, which constrain the movements of the jaw. The hollowspaces can be larger than the rods or bars, e.g., larger than a crosssection of the rods or bars, thus the jaw can move within theconstraints of the rods and bars. For example, the jaw can slide in adirection along the rods or bars. With the hollow spaces larger than therods or bars, the jaw can also move in a direction perpendicular to thedirection along the rods or bars. The rods or bars can be a part of theclamp bar, e.g., the connection element, meaning the rods and bars canbe secured at both ends to the jaw support if the jaw assembly includesa jaw and a jaw support. The clamp bar can include additional rods orbars.

In addition, by shaping the hollow spaces with respect to the rods orbars, the jaw can be further constrained to move in linear directionsinstead of moving in a plane perpendicular to the rods or bars. Forexample, the hollow spaces can include elongated holes along up and downdirections. The elongated hollow spaces thus can allow the rods or barsto move within the hollow spaces in the up and down directions. Theelongated holes can form minimum gaps with the rods or bars inhorizontal directions perpendicular to the up/down directions and to thedirections along the rods or bars. Thus the rods or bars is constrained,e.g., not able to move in the horizontal directions perpendicular to theup/down directions and to the directions along the rods or bars. Withthe elongated hollow spaces in the jaw, the jaw can move in upwarddirection, downward directions, direction toward the jaw support, anddirection away from the jaw support.

In some embodiments, there can be a limiter to restrict the movements ofthe jaw with respect to the jaw support (FIG. 4E). The limiter can becoupled to the jaw support, and include a stopper to prevent the jawfrom moving pass a certain position. The limiter can be coupled to othercomponents, such as coupled to the clamp bar, or to any component thatis fixed coupled to the jaw support.

There can be flexible couplings between the second jaw and the jawsupport. The flexible couplings can allow the second jaw to move inmultiple directions with respect to the jaw support, such as down andaway from the jaw support. The flexible couplings can include springs475 having two ends fixedly coupled to the second jaw and the jawsupport. The springs can bend and flex, allowing the second jaw to moverelative to the jaw support.

The springs 475 can also be tensioned to pull the jaw 441 toward the jawsupport 442. For example, the springs 475 can be stretched when beingassembled between the jaw and the jaw support. The stretched springs canfunction to pull the jaw toward the jaw support, for example, especiallywhen the tension in the pulling element is reduced, such as when thepulling element is released.

The pulling element can pulls up, rotating the rotatable element in adirection to push the jaw away from the jaw support. When the pullingelement is released, such as when a hoist coupled to the pulling elementis lowered when the clamping device is on the ground, the springassembly 445 can rotate the rotatable element in an opposite direction,which can roll the pulling element around the rotatable element, andwhich can create a gap between the jaw and the rotatable element. Thetensioned or stretched springs can pull the jaw toward the jaw support,to eliminate the gap.

The tensioned spring assembly thus can rotate the rotatable assemblywhen there is no tension or when there is less tension in the pullingelement, for example, when the pulling element is relaxed, not beingpulled up.

In addition, end point limits such as limiter 423 can be included toprevent the second jaw from moving too far from the jaw support. Thesecond jaw can be blocked in the horizontal directions by the jawsupport and the object, so there can be no need for end point limits inthe horizontal directions.

In some embodiments, the slanting interfaces can have low friction,e.g., lower than the friction at the interfaces between the jaws and theobject. For example, the friction at the interfaces between the jaws andthe object can be increased by adding a high friction layer, such as arubber pad, to the jaw external surfaces. Alternatively, the friction atthe slanting interface can be reduced by using rolling friction, e.g.,the pulling element can include rollers, which roll on a surface of thejaw, providing a rolling friction at the slanting interface between thepulling element and the jaw; or the rollers can roll on a surface of thejaw support, providing a rolling friction at the slanting interfacebetween the pulling element and the jaw support. Inversely, the jaw orthe jaw support can include rollers for rolling on surfaces of thepulling element.

FIGS. 5A-5B illustrate flow charts for forming and operating a clampingdevice according to some embodiments. In FIG. 5A, operation 500 forms aclamping device. The clamping device can include a first jaw fixedlycoupled to a clamp bar, and a second jaw assembly movably and fixedlycoupled to the clamp bar. The second jaw assembly can include a secondjaw and a jaw support, together with a rotatable element disposedbetween the second jaw and the jaw support. There can be at least aslanting interface coupling between the rotatable element and the secondjaw or between the rotatable element and the jaw support. The slantinginterface can be configured so that when the rotatable element rotates,the second jaw moves toward an object for keeping the object in place.

In some embodiments, the components of the clamping device, such as thejaw supports, the jaws, and the clamp bars, can include a metal coreembedded in a different material. The construction of the componentsusing metal cores can be simpler and more cost effective while meetingthe requirements of strength, hardness, durability and reliability.

In FIG. 5B, operation 520 places an object between a first jaw and asecond jaw of a clamping device. The second jaw can be part of a jawassembly. The jaw assembly further can include a jaw support and apulling element coupled to a rotatable element disposed between thesecond jaw and the jaw support. There can be at least a slantinginterface coupling between the rotatable element and the second jaw orbetween the rotatable element and the jaw support.

In some embodiments, a distance between the first jaw and the second jawcan be enlarged, for example, by disengaging a secure (locking)mechanism that is used to secure the jaw assembly to a clamp bar. Ifthere are two secure (locking) mechanisms, either one can be disengaged.After the secure (locking) mechanism is disengaged, the jaw assembly canbe freely moved along the clamp bar, and the jaw assembly can be movedaway from the other jaw or the other jaw assembly.

After placing the object in between the jaws, the distance between thefirst jaw and the second jaw can be optionally narrowed, for example, bymoving one jaw assembly toward the other jaw assembly. For example, ifthe first jaw assembly is fixedly coupled to the clamp bar, then thesecond jaw assembly can be pushed toward the first jaw assembly tonarrow the distance between the two jaws. The second jaw assembly can bestopped, e.g., after being pushed toward the first jaw assembly, whenthe total gap between the object and the jaws is at a minimum.

Operation 530 optionally locks the jaw assembly so that the object isdisposed between the first jaw and the second jaw. The secure (locking)mechanism can be a discrete secure (locking) mechanism, meaning the jawassembly can be secured to the clamp bar at discrete locations. The jawassembly is then locked, e.g., the secure (locking) mechanism isengaged, at a location that the total gap between the object and thejaws is minimum, e.g., the total gap is smaller than a distance betweentwo discrete locations that the secure (locking) mechanism can beengaged.

Operation 540 lifts the pulling element which rotates the rotatableelement, which moves the second jaw toward the object, since theslanting interface is configured so that when the pulling element movesup, the second jaw moves toward the object. The pulling element can belifted slowly, to ensure that the object is still placed on the groundwhen there is a gap between the object and the jaws. After the jawscontact the object, the pulling element can be further lifted to liftthe object from the ground. The pulling force, and/or the weight of theobject, can be converted to a clamping force of the jaws against theobject, keeping the object within the grip of the clamping device.

In some embodiments, a clamping device can be formed by forming a clampbar, e.g., a connection element for the two jaw assemblies, forming afirst jaw, and then coupling the first jaw with the clamp bar. A secondjaw can be formed, which includes a jaw support and a second jaw. Thejaw support can be coupled with the clamp bar. The second jaw can becoupled with the jaw support by a set of springs.

In some embodiments, one or more slanting interfaces of the clampingdevice can have a low friction, such as a low coefficient of friction.The friction of the slanting interfaces can be lower than that of thegripping interfaces, e.g., the interfaces between the object and thejaws gripping the object.

The lower friction can be achieved by increasing the friction of thegripping interfaces or gripping surfaces. For example, the jaw outersurfaces, e.g., the surfaces of the jaws to be in contact with theobject, can have a high friction layer disposed thereon. For example, arubber layer can be coupled to the jaw, to increase the friction of thejaw with the object, which can prevent the object from slipping from thejaw during the handling of the object.

The lower friction can be achieved by decreasing the friction of theslanting interfaces. For example, the slanting interfaces, e.g., themating surfaces between two parts in the jaw assembly, such as theinterface between the jaw and the rotatable element, or the interfacebetween the rotatable element and the jaw support, can have smoothersurfaces, such as having a grease coating, or low contact area surfaces,such as rolling frictions from balls or rollers. The low frictioninterfaces can make it easier for the rotatable element to move withrespect to the jaw while the jaws grip the object.

For example, the rotatable element can have rolling balls on one or twosurfaces, e.g., on one surface facing the second jaw, or on one surfacefacing the jaw support, or on both surfaces. Alternatively, the secondjaw can have rolling balls on the surface facing the rotatable element,or the jaw support can have rolling balls on the surface facing therotatable element.

In some embodiments, a clamping device can have a rotatable elementhaving a slanting surface. The slanting surface can include a curvesurface, e.g., having a spiral curve configuration on a rotatableelement, so that a point on the slanting surface can move away or towardan end of the rotatable element when the rotatable element rotates. Forexample, the rotatable element can include a cylinder with aperpendicular end, e.g., the surface of the perpendicular end forms aright angle with an axis of the cylinder. An opposite end of thecylinder can have a slanting surface, such as a curve or a spiralsurface. Thus, when the cylinder rotates, a point on the curve or spiralsurface can move linearly along the axis of the cylinder, toward or awayfrom the perpendicular end.

FIGS. 6A-6C illustrate a rotatable element having a slanting surfaceaccording to some embodiments. FIG. 6A shows a perspective view and FIG.6B shows a side view of a rotatable element 630. The rotatable 630 caninclude a base 631 and a spiral component 671, e.g., a curve elementwith gradually increase thickness. The rotatable element can be disposedbetween a jaw and a jaw support of a jaw assembly of a clamping device.For example, a jaw can be coupled to the base 631 of the rotatableelement, while the jaw support interfacing the spiral component 671 ofthe rotatable element. Alternatively, the jaw support can be coupled tothe base and the jaw coupled to the spiral component.

One or more rollers 644A and 644B can interface the spiral component671, e.g., resting against the spiral surface of the spiral component.The rollers can have a same axis of rotation, and can be mounted on ajaw 641 or on a jaw support 642.

A pulling element 643 can be coupled to the rotatable element 630 torotate the rotatable element. For example, a cable, such as a steelcable or a chain, can wrap around the base of the rotatable element,with one end fixedly coupled to the base. Thus when the cable is pulled,the rotatable element can rotate in one direction. The rotatable elementcan be spring-loaded, so that when the cable is released, the rotatableelement rotates in an opposite direction.

When the rotatable element rotates, for example, by pulling on thepulling element, the rollers roll on the spiral surface whilemaintaining a same axis of rotation. The axis of rotation can movelinearly with respect to the base of the rotatable element, e.g.,staying closer to the base at one section of the spiral surface, andstay farther from the base at another section of the spiral surface.

As shown, the slanting surface, e.g., the spiral surface, is coupled tothe rotatable component, to interface with rollers coupled to the jaw orthe jaw support. Alternatively, the slanting surface, e.g., the spiralsurface, can be coupled to the jaw or to the jaw support, to interfacewith rollers coupled to the rotatable component.

FIGS. 6C (a)-(c) show an operation of the rotatable element. Therotatable element 630 can be disposed between a jaw 641 and a jawsupport 642 of a jaw assembly of a clamping device. As shown, therotatable element has a base end facing the jaw 641 and the spiralsurface interfacing rollers coupled to the jaw support. Otherconfiguration can be used, such as the base facing the jaw support andthe spiral surface interfacing the jaw. In some embodiments, the jawsupport can be fixedly coupled to the clamp bar of the clamping device.

In FIG. 6C (a), the rollers are resting on one end of the spiralsurface, e.g., the end section of the spiral surface closest to thebase, separating the jaw support 642 from the jaw 641 by a distance675A.

In FIG. 6C (b), the rotatable element 630 can rotate 673, for example,by pulling on the pulling element. The rollers can roll on the spiralsurface of the rotatable element. The rotatable element can rotate anangle, so that the rollers are resting on a section of the spiralsurface, away from the end section. A force 674 can be exerted on eitherthe rotatable element or the jaw support when the rotatable elementrotates to increase the distance between the jaw and the jaw support tobe 675B, which is larger than the previous distance of 675A.

In FIG. 6C (c), the rotatable element 630 can continue to rotate 673.The distance can further increase to 675C, which is larger than theprevious distances of 675B and 675A.

Thus, the rotatable element can convert a vertical pulling force on thepulling element to a horizontal force, to push the jaw away from the jawsupport, for clamping on an object.

FIGS. 7A-7C illustrate a rotatable element having a slanting surfaceaccording to some embodiments. FIG. 7A shows a perspective view of arotatable element 730, and FIG. 7B shows a perspective view of a matingcomponent to the rotatable element, such as a jaw 741 or a jaw support742. The rotatable 730 can include a base 731 and a spiral surface on aspiral component 771. The rotatable element can be disposed between ajaw and a jaw support of a jaw assembly of a clamping device. Forexample, a jaw can be coupled to the base 731 of the rotatable element,while the jaw support interfacing the spiral component 771 of therotatable element. Alternatively, the jaw support can be coupled to thebase and the jaw coupled to the spiral component.

A mating spiral component 744, e.g., a spiral component that caninterface the spiral component 771, can be used to interface the spiralcomponent 771, e.g., facing against the spiral surface of the spiralcomponent. The mating spiral component 744 can be mounted on a jaw 741or on a jaw support 742.

A pulling element 743 can be coupled to the rotatable element 730 torotate the rotatable element. For example, a cable, such as a steelcable or a chain, can wrap around the base of the rotatable element,with one end fixedly coupled to the base. Thus when the cable is pulled,the rotatable element can rotate in one direction. The rotatable elementcan be spring-loaded, so that when the cable is released, the rotatableelement rotates in an opposite direction.

When the rotatable element rotates, for example, by pulling on thepulling element, the mating spiral surface can slide on the spiralsurface. The mating spiral component thus can move linearly with respectto the base of the rotatable element, e.g., staying closer to the baseat one section of the spiral surface, and stay farther from the base atanother section of the spiral surface.

FIGS. 7C (a)-(c) show an operation of the rotatable element. Therotatable element 730 can be disposed between a jaw 741 and a jawsupport 742 of a jaw assembly of a clamping device. As shown, therotatable element has a base end facing the jaw 741 and the spiralsurface interfacing the mating spiral interface coupled to the jawsupport. Other configuration can be used, such as the base facing thejaw support and the spiral surface interfacing the jaw. In someembodiments, the jaw support can be fixedly coupled to the clamp bar ofthe clamping device.

In FIG. 7C (a), the two spiral surfaces are facing each other at aposition with maximum surface contact between the two spiral surfaces,e.g., the thickest part of the mating spiral surface contacting thethinnest part of the spiral surface. The jaw 741 is separated from thejaw support 742 by a distance 775A.

In FIG. 7C (b), the rotatable element 730 can rotate 773, for example,by pulling on the pulling element. The mating spiral surface can slideon the spiral surface of the rotatable element. The rotatable elementcan rotate an angle, so that the two spiral surfaces are at a positionwith less surface contact as compared to the position having maximumsurface contact. A force 774 can be exerted on either the rotatableelement or the jaw support when the rotatable element rotates toincrease the distance between the jaw and the jaw support to be 775B,which is larger than the previous distance of 775A.

In FIG. 7C (c), the rotatable element 730 can continue to rotate 773.The distance can further increase to 775C, which is larger than theprevious distances of 775B and 775A.

Thus, the rotatable element can convert a vertical pulling force on thepulling element to a horizontal force, to push the jaw away from the jawsupport, for clamping on an object.

FIGS. 8A-8C illustrate a rotatable element having a slanting surfaceaccording to some embodiments. FIG. 8A shows a perspective view and FIG.8B shows a side view of a rotatable element 830. The slanting surfacecan include two end-to-end spiral surfaces disposed in two portions ofthe rotatable component. The rotatable 830 can include a base 831 andtwo spiral components 871A and 871B. The two spiral components canformed one after the other, so that there can be two spiral surfacesfollowing each other. A spiral surface can increase from a thinnestthickness to a thickest thickness, followed by another spiral surfacealso from a thinnest thickness to a thickest thickness. The two spiralsurfaces can be mated with two rollers 844.

The rotatable element can be disposed between a jaw and a jaw support ofa jaw assembly of a clamping device. For example, a jaw can be coupledto the base 831 of the rotatable element, while the jaw supportinterfacing the spiral component 871 of the rotatable element.Alternatively, the jaw support can be coupled to the base and the jawcoupled to the spiral component.

Two rollers 844 can interface the spiral components 871A and 871B, e.g.,resting against the spiral surfaces of the spiral components. Therollers can have a same axis of rotation, and can be mounted on a jaw841 or on a jaw support 842.

A pulling element 843 can be coupled to the rotatable element 830 torotate the rotatable element. For example, a cable, such as a steelcable or a chain, can wrap around the base of the rotatable element,with one end fixedly coupled to the base. Thus when the cable is pulled,the rotatable element can rotate in one direction. The rotatable elementcan be spring-loaded, so that when the cable is released, the rotatableelement rotates in an opposite direction.

When the rotatable element rotates, for example, by pulling on thepulling element, the rollers roll on the spiral surface whilemaintaining a same axis of rotation. The axis of rotation can movelinearly with respect to the base of the rotatable element, e.g.,staying closer to the base at one section of the spiral surface, andstay farther from the base at another section of the spiral surface.

As shown, the slanting surface, e.g., the spiral surface, is coupled tothe rotatable component, to interface with rollers coupled to the jaw orthe jaw support. Alternatively, the slanting surface, e.g., the spiralsurface, can be coupled to the jaw or to the jaw support, to interfacewith rollers coupled to the rotatable component.

FIGS. 8C (a)-(c) show an operation of the rotatable element. Therotatable element 830 can be disposed between a jaw 841 and a jawsupport 842 of a jaw assembly of a clamping device. As shown, therotatable element has a base end facing the jaw 841 and the spiralsurfaces interfacing rollers coupled to the jaw support. Otherconfiguration can be used, such as the base facing the jaw support andthe spiral surfaces interfacing the jaw. In some embodiments, the jawsupport can be fixedly coupled to the clamp bar of the clamping device.

In FIG. 8C (a), the rollers are resting on one end of the spiralsurfaces, e.g., the end section of the spiral surface closest to thebase, separating the jaw support 842 from the jaw 841 by a distance875A.

In FIG. 8C (b), the rotatable element 830 can rotate 873, for example,by pulling on the pulling element. The rollers can roll on the spiralsurfaces of the rotatable element. The rotatable element can rotate anangle, so that the rollers are resting on a section of the spiralsurfaces, away from the end section. A force 874 can be exerted oneither the rotatable element or the jaw support when the rotatableelement rotates to increase the distance between the jaw and the jawsupport to be 875B, which is larger than the previous distance of 875A.

In FIG. 8C (c), the rotatable element 830 can continue to rotate 873.The distance can further increase to 875C, which is larger than theprevious distances of 875B and 875A.

Thus, the rotatable element can convert a vertical pulling force on thepulling element to a horizontal force, to push the jaw away from the jawsupport, for clamping on an object.

FIGS. 9A-9C illustrate a rotatable element having a slanting surfaceaccording to some embodiments. FIG. 9A shows a perspective view of arotatable element 930, and FIG. 9B shows a perspective view of a matingcomponent to the rotatable element, such as a jaw 941 or a jaw support942. The slanting surface can include two spiral surfaces disposed intwo portions of the rotatable component. The rotatable 930 can include abase 931 and two spiral surfaces on two spiral components 971. Therotatable element can be disposed between a jaw and a jaw support of ajaw assembly of a clamping device. For example, a jaw can be coupled tothe base 931 of the rotatable element, while the jaw support interfacingthe spiral components 971 of the rotatable element. Alternatively, thejaw support can be coupled to the base and the jaw coupled to the spiralcomponents.

Mating spiral components 944, e.g., spiral components that can interfacethe spiral components 971, can be used to interface the spiralcomponents 971, e.g., facing against the spiral surfaces of the spiralcomponents. The mating spiral components 944 can be mounted on a jaw 941or on a jaw support 942.

A pulling element 943 can be coupled to the rotatable element 930 torotate the rotatable element. For example, a cable, such as a steelcable or a chain, can wrap around the base of the rotatable element,with one end fixedly coupled to the base. Thus when the cable is pulled,the rotatable element can rotate in one direction. The rotatable elementcan be spring-loaded, so that when the cable is released, the rotatableelement rotates in an opposite direction.

When the rotatable element rotates, for example, by pulling on thepulling element, the mating spiral surfaces can slide on the spiralsurfaces. The mating spiral components thus can move linearly withrespect to the base of the rotatable element, e.g., staying closer tothe base at one section of the spiral surface, and stay farther from thebase at another section of the spiral surface.

FIGS. 9C (a)-(c) show an operation of the rotatable element. Therotatable element 930 can be disposed between a jaw 941 and a jawsupport 942 of a jaw assembly of a clamping device. As shown, therotatable element has a base end facing the jaw 941 and the spiralsurfaces interfacing the mating spiral surfaces coupled to the jawsupport. Other configuration can be used, such as the base facing thejaw support and the spiral surfaces interfacing the jaw. In someembodiments, the jaw support can be fixedly coupled to the clamp bar ofthe clamping device.

In FIG. 9C (a), the spiral surfaces and the mating spiral surfaces arefacing each other at a position with maximum surface contact between thespiral surfaces, e.g., the thickest part of the mating spiral surfacescontacting the thinnest part of the spiral surfaces. The jaw 941 isseparated from the jaw support 942 by a distance 975A.

In FIG. 9C (b), the rotatable element 930 can rotate 973, for example,by pulling on the pulling element. The mating spiral surfaces can slideon the spiral surfaces of the rotatable element. The rotatable elementcan rotate an angle, so that the spiral surfaces are at a position withless surface contact as compared to the position having maximum surfacecontact. A force 974 can be exerted on either the rotatable element orthe jaw support when the rotatable element rotates to increase thedistance between the jaw and the jaw support to be 975B, which is largerthan the previous distance of 975A.

In FIG. 9C (c), the rotatable element 930 can continue to rotate 973.The distance can further increase to 975C, which is larger than theprevious distances of 975B and 975A.

Thus, the rotatable element can convert a vertical pulling force on thepulling element to a horizontal force, to push the jaw away from the jawsupport, for clamping on an object.

FIGS. 10A-10C illustrate flow charts for forming rotatable elementsaccording to some embodiments. In FIG. 10A, operation 1000 forms aclamping device. The clamping device can include a rotatable componentcoupled to a jaw support. The rotatable component or the jaw support caninclude a slanting interface. The slanting interface can be configuredso that when the rotatable component rotates, the rotatable componentmoves relative to the jaw support in a direction along an axis ofrotation. The slanting interface can include a slanting surface, such asone or more spiral surfaces, interfacing one or more rollers. Theslanting interface can include a slanting surface, such as one or morespiral surfaces, interfacing another slanting surface, such as one ormore mating spiral surfaces, e.g., second spiral surfaces which can bemated with the first spiral surfaces.

In FIG. 10B, operation 1020 forms a clamping device. The clamping devicecan include a rotatable component disposed between a jaw and a jawsupport. The rotatable component can include a slanting surfaceinterfacing a roller coupled to the jaw support or to the jaw. Theinterface can be configured so that when the rotatable componentrotates, the roller rolls on the slanting surface in such a way to movethe rotatable component relative to the jaw support or the jaw in adirection along an axis of rotation.

The slanting interface can include a slanting surface, such as one ormore spiral surfaces, interfacing one or more rollers. The slantinginterface can include a slanting surface, such as one or more spiralsurfaces, interfacing another slanting surface, such as one or moremating spiral surfaces, e.g., second spiral surfaces which can be matedwith the first spiral surfaces.

Alternatively, the jaw support can include a slanting surfaceinterfacing a roller coupled to the rotatable component.

In FIG. 10C, operation 1040 forms a clamping device. The clamping devicecan include a rotatable component coupled to a jaw support. Therotatable component can include a slanting surface interfacing a matingsurface of the jaw support. The interface can be configured so that whenthe rotatable component rotates, the slanting surface moves on themating surface in such a way to move the rotatable component relative tothe jaw support in a direction along an axis of rotation.

The slanting interface can include a slanting surface, such as one ormore spiral surfaces, interfacing one or more rollers. The slantinginterface can include a slanting surface, such as one or more spiralsurfaces, interfacing another slanting surface, such as one or moremating spiral surfaces, e.g., second spiral surfaces which can be matedwith the first spiral surfaces.

Alternatively, the jaw support can include a slanting surfaceinterfacing a roller coupled to the rotatable component.

FIGS. 11A-11D illustrate a configuration of a clamping device accordingto some embodiments. A clamping device 1100 can include two jaws 1160and 1141 for clamping on an object 1110. The jaw 1160 can be fixedcoupled to a clamp bar 1150, which can include multiple rods. The jaw1141 can be movably coupled to the clamp bar, e.g., the jaw 1141 canslide along the clamp bar 1150. A jaw support 1142 can be fixedlycoupled to the clamp bar, which can be configured as a support for thejaw 1141 to slide along the clamp bar.

A spring assembly 1175 can be coupled between the jaw 1141 and the jawsupport 1142. The springs in the spring assembly 1175 can be tensionedas to pulling the jaw 1141 toward the jaw support 1142. For example, thesprings can be stretched from a stable or equilibrium position beforethe two ends of the springs are coupled to the jaw and the jaw support.Thus, the jaw is normally pulled toward the jaw support.

A rotatable element 1130 can be rotatably coupled to the jaw 1141, e.g.,the rotatable element can move as a same unit with the jaw 1141, and canrotate 1173 with respect to the jaw 1141. For example, the rotatableelement can be mounted on to the jaw 1141 through a set of bearings.

The rotatable element can include a slanting surface, such as one ormore spiral surfaces 1171. The slanting surface can be configured sothat the rotatable element can move toward or away from the jaw supportwhen rotating.

A pulling element 1143 can be coupled to the rotatable element to rotatethe rotatable element. For example, a solid pulling element can be usedto rotate the rotatable element in either rotation direction. A flexiblepulling element, such as a flexible line of a cable or a chain, can beused to rotate the rotatable element in one direction when the cable ispulled up. When using flexible pulling elements, a spring set 1145 canbe used to rotate the rotatable element in the opposite direction. Forexample, when a flexible pulling element is released from pulling, thespring set, which is pre-tensioned from a stable position into therotation direction of the rotatable element when the pulling element ispulling, can return to the stable position by rotating the rotatableelement in the opposite direction.

In some embodiments, one or more rollers 1144 can be used to interfacewith the slanting surface, e.g., one or more spiral surfaces on therotatable element. The rollers can be coupled to the jaw support 1142,e.g., the axes of the rollers are fixedly coupled to the jaw support andthe rollers are free to roll on the fixed axes. Typically, when therotatable element rotate in one direction, such as direction 1173, bypulling on the flexible pulling element 1143, the slanting surfaces 1171can push on the rollers 1144 to separate the jaw 1141 and the jawsupport 1142, e.g., moving the jaw 1141 away from the jaw support 1142.When the flexible pulling element is released, e.g., the pulling forceis reduced to be less than the tension of the spring set 1145, thespring set 1145 can rotate the rotatable element. There can be a gapbetween the rollers and the slanting surfaces. The spring assembly 1175can then pull the jaw toward the jaw support, eliminating the gap. As aresult, when the pulling element is pulled, the rotatable elementrotates in direction 1173, separating the jaw and the jaw support. Whenthe pulling element is released, e.g., refrained from pulling, therotatable element rotates in an opposite direction, moving the jawtoward the jaw support.

In operation, the two jaws can be separated at a distance larger than adimension of an object, such as larger than a thickness of the object.The clamping device is then positioned so that the object is disposedbetween the two jaws. There can be a gap 1122 between the jaws and theobject.

The pulling element is then pulled up 1133, for example, by a hoistcoupled to the pulling element. When the pulling element is pulled, therotatable element rotates, and the slanting interface between therotatable element and the jaw support can cause the rotatable element tomove away from the jaw support, to close the gap until the jaws are incontact with the object.

Further pulling of the pulling element can exert a force from the jawson the object, to effectively clamping the object between the jaws. Thehoist then can move up further to lift the clamping device and theobject clamped between the jaws.

Other configurations can be used, such as a second slanting surface onthe jaw support to interface with the slanting surface of the rotatableelement, instead of rollers. Also, the rotatable element can berotatably coupled to the jaw support, instead of to the jaw. The jaw canbe flexibly coupled to the jaw support, instead of movably coupled tothe clamp bar.

FIGS. 12A-12B illustrate flow charts for forming an operating a clampingdevice according to some embodiments. In FIG. 12A, operation 1200 formsa clamping device. The clamping device can include a first jaw fixedlycoupled to a clamp bar, and a second jaw assembly coupled to the clampbar. The second jaw assembly can include a second jaw and a jaw support.The second jaw assembly can include a rotatable component comprising aslanting interface and a pulling component coupled to the rotatablecomponent. The pulling component can be configured to rotate therotatable component. The slanting interface can be configured so thatwhen the pulling component moves up, the distance between the second jawand the jaw support increases.

In FIG. 12B, operation 1220 places an object between a first jaw and asecond jaw of a clamping device. The second jaw is part of a jawassembly. The jaw assembly further can include a jaw support and apulling element having a pulling component disposed between the secondjaw and the jaw support. There can be at least a slanting interfacecoupling between the pulling element and the second jaw or between thepulling element and the jaw support. In some embodiments, the slantinginterface can include spiral surfaces coupled with rollers. For example,the rotatable element can include one or more spiral surfacesinterfacing one or more rollers coupled to the jaw support.Alternatively, the jaw support can include one or more spiral surfacesinterfacing one or more rollers coupled to the rotatable element.

Operation 1230 optionally locks the jaw assembly so that the object isdisposed between the first jaw and the second jaw. Operation 1240 liftsthe pulling component which moves the second jaw toward the object,since the slanting interface can be configured so that when the pullingelement moves up, the second jaw moves toward the object.

In some embodiments, a secure (locking) mechanism can be formed tosecure a movable jaw assembly to the clamp bar. The secure (locking)mechanism can be used to secure the jaw or the jaw support of a movablejaw assembly to the clamp bar.

The jaw assembly can be fixedly coupled to the clamp bar, e.g., the jawassembly cannot be moved. For example, a jaw or a jaw support of thefixed jaw assembly can be secured to the clamp bar, for example, withbolts.

The jaw assembly can be movable along the clamp bar to accommodatedifferent sizes of the objects. For example, the jaw or the jaw supportof the jaw assembly can have a hollow portion for the clamp bar to passthrough.

The secure (locking) mechanism can secure the movable jaw assembly tothe clamp bar. The secure (locking) mechanism can be continuous, meaningthe jaw assembly can be moved and secured, e.g. locked, along the clampbar until the object is placed between the two jaws, meaning there iszero or a very little gap between the object and the jaws.

The continuous secure (locking) mechanism can include a screw type,meaning a lead screw can be used to move the jaw support assembly alongthe clamp bar. A lock can be included, such as a screw or a clamp tolock the lead screw or to lock the handle that turns the lead screw.

The secure (locking) mechanism can be discrete, meaning the jaw assemblycan be moved continuously along the clamp bar, but can only be secured,e.g. locked, at predetermined locations along the clamp bar. Thus thejaw assembly can move from a lockable location to another lockablelocation, until there is a minimum gap between the object and the jaws,meaning the next lockable location would not be large enough toaccommodate the object.

The discrete secure (locking) mechanism can include a peg fitting intoone of multiple holes, or a cyclic pattern bar (such as a rack bar, or abar having repeat triangle shapes)

A cyclic pattern bar and a mating pattern component can be used forsecuring the jaw support assembly to the clamp bar at discretelocations, meaning at locations that the pattern of the patent componentfitted to one of the multiple patterns of the cyclic pattern bar. Thecyclic pattern bar can include a rack bar, a tooth bar, a cog bar, or alinear gear bar, which can be fixedly coupled to the clamp bar. Forexample, the pattern can be a triangle. The pattern component can have arecess with the shape of the triangle. The cyclic pattern bar can havemultiple mating triangles, e.g., triangles that match with the triangleof the pattern component, such as with the base of the triangles at thebase of the cyclic pattern bar, and the tip of the triangle protrudedfrom the base. Alternatively, the pattern component can have one or moretriangles protruded from the pattern component. The cyclic pattern barcan have multiple recesses of triangle shapes. Thus the jaw support canbe locked onto various locations of the cyclic pattern bar. For example,the jaw support can be released from the cyclic pattern bar, such as bypulling the jaw support assembly in a downward direction for disengagingwith the cyclic pattern bar. In this disengaged position, the releasedjaw support assembly can be moved along the clamp bar (and the cyclicpattern bar), to adjust the size of the opening between the first jawand the second jaw, to accommodate different object sizes.

At the appropriate opening size, the jaw support assembly can beengaged, such as by pushing up the mating pattern component, thus thepattern component is engaged with the cyclic pattern bar. In thisengaged position, the jaw assembly can be locked to the clamp bar.

In some embodiments, one way pattern secure (locking) can be used,meaning the jaw support assembly can be moved along the clamp bar tonarrow the opening between the two jaws, but cannot be moved in theopposite direction to enlarge the opening. For example, the trianglepattern can have an acute angle in one side and an obtuse angle inanother side. The asymmetric triangle can prevent movement against theacute side while allowing movement against the obtuse side.

In some embodiments, the pattern can be asymmetric, for example, so thatthe jaw assembly can be easier to move toward the object, while it ismuch more difficult to move back away from the object. This will providea further security against the losing the clamping action of theclamping device.

In some embodiments, the secure (locking) mechanism can include a cyclicpattern configuration, such as a series of holes on the clamp bar. Thesecure (locking) mechanism can include a mating pattern component, suchas a pin, a rod or a bar which can fit into the holes. The matingpattern component can be movably coupled to the jaw assembly, such as tothe jaw support. For example, the mating pattern component, e.g., thepin, can be movable, such as pulling back for disengaging with the clampbar, e.g., out of the hole. In this disengaged position, the jawassembly can be free to move along the clamp bar. The mating patterncomponent, e.g., the pin, can be pushed up, entering one hole in theholes in the clamp bar. In this engaged position, the jaw assembly canbe locked to the clamp bar.

The jaw support can include a pattern component, which is a peg, whichcan be mated to various positions of a cyclic pattern bar, whichincludes multiple holes. As shown, the mating is in the shape of pegsand holes, e.g., the cyclic pattern bar can have multiple holes, and thepattern component can have a peg, such as a round peg. Thus the jawsupport can be locked onto various locations of the cyclic pattern bar.For example, the jaw component can be released from the cyclic patternbar, such as by pulling the peg in a generally downward (or sideway)direction. The released jaw support assembly can be moved along theclamp bar (and the cyclic pattern bar), to adjust the size of theopening between the first jaw and the second jaw, to accommodatedifferent object sizes. At the appropriate opening size, the jaw supportassembly can be engaged, meaning the pattern component is engaged withthe cyclic pattern bar, to lock the jaw support assembly in place.

FIGS. 13A-13D illustrate configurations for clamping devices with secure(locking) mechanisms according to some embodiments. In FIG. 13A, aclamping device 1300 can have a secure (locking) mechanism 1370 forsecuring a movable jaw assembly, such as securing a jaw support 1340, toa clamp bar 1350. The secure (locking) mechanism 1370 can include acyclic pattern bar 1371, such as a rack bar, a tooth bar, a cog bar, ora linear gear bar. The cyclic pattern bar 1371 can be fixedly coupled tothe clamp bar. The secure (locking) mechanism 1370 can include a matingpattern component 1372, such as a rod or a bar having a mated pattern atone end, such as a tooth pattern, a gear pattern, or a cog pattern. Themating pattern component 1372 can be movably coupled to the jawassembly, such as to the jaw support 1340. For example, the matingpattern component 1372 can be movable 1373, such as pulling back fordisengaging with the cyclic pattern bar 1371. In this disengagedposition, the jaw assembly can be free to move along the clamp bar. Themating pattern component 1372 can be pushed up, contacting the cyclicpattern bar 1371 to engage with the cyclic pattern bar 1371. In thisengaged position 1341, the jaw assembly can be locked to the clamp bar.

As shown, the mating is in the shape of triangles, e.g., the cyclicpattern bar can have multiple triangles protruded from a base, and thepattern component can have multiple triangular recesses. Thus the jawsupport can be locked onto various locations of the cyclic pattern bar.For example, the jaw component can be released from the cyclic patternbar, such as by pulling the jaw support assembly in a downwarddirection. The released jaw support assembly can be moved along theclamp bar (and the cyclic pattern bar), to adjust the size of theopening between the first jaw and the second jaw, to accommodatedifferent object sizes. At the appropriate opening size, the jaw supportassembly can be engaged, meaning the pattern component is engaged withthe cyclic pattern bar, to lock the jaw support assembly in place.

In some embodiments, one way pattern secure (locking) can be used,meaning the jaw support assembly can be moved along the clamp bar tonarrow the opening between the two jaws, but cannot be moved in theopposite direction to enlarge the opening. For example, the trianglepattern can have an acute angle in one side and an obtuse angle inanother side. The asymmetric triangle can prevent movement against theacute side while allowing movement against the obtuse side.

In some embodiments, the pattern can be asymmetric, for example, so thatthe jaw assembly can be easier to move toward the object, while it ismuch more difficult to move back away from the object. This will providea further security against the losing the clamping action of theclamping device.

In FIG. 13B, a clamping device 1305 can have a secure (locking)mechanism 1375 for securing a movable jaw assembly, such as securing ajaw support 1345, to a clamp bar 1355. The secure (locking) mechanism1375 can include a cyclic pattern configuration 1376, such as a seriesof holes on the clamp bar. The secure (locking) mechanism 1370 caninclude a mating pattern component 1377, such as a pin, a rod or a barwhich can fit into the holes. The mating pattern component 1377 can bemovably coupled to the jaw assembly, such as to the jaw support. Forexample, the mating pattern component 1377, e.g., the pin 1377, can bemovable 1378, such as pulling back for disengaging with the clamp bar,e.g., out of the hole 1376. In this disengaged position, the jawassembly can be free to move along the clamp bar. The mating patterncomponent 1377, e.g., the pin 1377, can be pushed up, entering one holein the holes 1376 in the clamp bar. In this engaged position 1342, thejaw assembly can be locked to the clamp bar.

The jaw support can include a pattern component 1377, which is a peg,which can be mated to various positions of a cyclic pattern bar 1376,which includes multiple holes. As shown, the mating is in the shape ofpegs and holes, e.g., the cyclic pattern bar can have multiple holes,and the pattern component can have a peg, such as a round peg. Thus thejaw support can be locked onto various locations of the cyclic patternbar. For example, the jaw component can be released from the cyclicpattern bar, such as by pulling the peg in a generally downward (orsideway) direction. The released jaw support assembly can be moved alongthe clamp bar (and the cyclic pattern bar), to adjust the size of theopening between the first jaw and the second jaw, to accommodatedifferent object sizes. At the appropriate opening size, the jaw supportassembly can be engaged, meaning the pattern component is engaged withthe cyclic pattern bar, to lock the jaw support assembly in place.

FIG. 13C shows an operation to clamp the object with the clamping devicewith a discrete secure (locking) mechanism. The lock mechanism can bedisengaged, e.g., the pattern component can be pulled back 1336, so thatthe pattern component is disengaged 1382 from the cyclic pattern bar.The jaw support assembly can slide back to enlarge the opening betweenthe two jaws. An object 1310, such as a slap, can be placed between thetwo jaws. The jaw support assembly can be slide forward to make surethat the total gaps 1312+1313 between the jaws and the object isminimal, meaning that that total gaps are the smallest when the lockmechanism is engaged.

The lock mechanism is then engaged, e.g., the pattern component can bepushed up 1338 toward the cyclic pattern bar, so that the patterncomponent is engaged 1383 with the cyclic pattern bar. The jaw assemblyis now fixedly coupled to the clamp bar.

The pulling element 1337 can be pulled up, e.g., in a substantiallyvertical direction 1385. Due to the slanting surface between the jawsupport and the pulling element 1337, and since the jaw support islocked, the upward movement 1385 of the pulling element can have acomponent moving toward the object, e.g., the pulling element moves in adirection 1386 upward and toward the object.

The side movement of the pulling element can move the second jaw 1327toward the object, until the second jaw is in contact with the object.

When the second jaw is not yet in contact with the object, the secondjaw can be freely moved, and therefore the second jaw can move in adownward direction 1384 (due to gravity) toward the object, meaningsliding vertically down and horizontally sideway.

When the second jaw contacts the object, the upward movement 1385 of thepulling element can push on the second jaw. With a good friction betweenthe second jaw and the object, the second jaw can only be pushed towardthe object without actually moving, thus clamping on the object.

In FIG. 13D, a clamping device 1307 can have a screw type mechanism,such as lead screw, ball screw, or other screw type mechanism 1360, forsecuring a movable jaw assembly, such as securing a jaw support 1347, toa clamp bar 1357. When the lead screw 1360 is turned, the jaw support1347 can move linearly. For example, the lead screw 1360 can turn in onedirection (depending on the direction of the teeth of the lead screw),and the jaw support can move toward the fixed jaw. When the lead screw1360 turns in an opposite direction, the jaw support can move away fromthe fixed jaw. The lead screw can allow a continuous movement of the jawsupport. For example, the jaw support can move backward, e.g., away fromthe jaw, to widen the gap between the jaw and the jaw support. After anobject, such as a slap, is positioned between the jaw and the jawsupport, the lead screw can be turned to secure the object between thejaw and the jaw support. The lead screw can have a large enoughdimension to prevent bending, due to the pulling action of the weight ofthe object.

In some embodiments, a secure mechanism can be used to lock the leadscrew, for example, to prevent the lead screw from moving. In general,the jaw support can only move linearly, and thus it is not easy for thelead screw to turn due to the force acting on the jaw support. However,vibration can loosen the lead screw. Thus, a secure mechanism can beused to lock the lead screw, after setting the lead screw to anappropriate location for securing the object. The secure mechanism caninclude a lock washer and a nut 1361, which can be tightened against theclamp bar, to prevent any movement of the lead screw.

FIGS. 14A-14B illustrate a clamping device according to someembodiments. FIG. 14A shows a cross section of a clamping device, whichcan include a first jaw 1460 fixedly coupled to a clamp bar 1450, suchas a single bar or multiple connection bars. The first jaw can include arubber pad 1465 to increase a friction with objects to be clamped. Insome embodiments, the first jaw can be removably coupled to the clampbar, together with a secure (locking) mechanism for securing the firstjaw to the clamp bar. Alternatively, the first jaw can be a part of afirst jaw assembly, which can also include a first jaw support. Thefirst jaw of the first jaw support can be coupled to the clamp bar, suchas fixedly coupled or removably coupled with a secure (locking)mechanism.

The clamping device can include a second jaw assembly, which can bemovably and lockably coupled to the clamp bar. The second jaw assemblycan include a second jaw 1441 disposed opposite the first jaw. Thesecond jaw can include a rubber pad 1445 to increase a friction withobjects to be clamped. The second jaw assembly can include a jaw support1442, which can slide along the clamp bar for movably coupled to theclamp bar. As shown, the first jaw is fixedly coupled to the clamp bar,and the second jaw assembly is movably coupled to the clamp bar. Otherconfigurations can be used, such as the first jaw is movably coupled tothe clamp bar, and the second jaw assembly is fixedly coupled to theclamp bar. Alternatively, the first jaw and the second jaw assembly canboth be movably coupled to the clamp bar. A jaw or a jaw assembly, ifmovably coupled to the clamp bar, can include a secure (locking)mechanism for securing the jaw or the jaw assembly to the clamp bar.

There can be flexible couplings between the second jaw and the jawsupport. The flexible couplings can allow the second jaw to move inmultiple directions with respect to the jaw support, such as down andaway from the jaw support. The flexible couplings can include springs1475 having two ends fixedly coupled to the second jaw 1441 and the jawsupport 1442. The springs can bend and flex, allowing the second jaw tomove relative to the jaw support.

In addition, end point limits can be included to prevent the second jawfrom moving too far from the jaw support. The second jaw can be blockedin the horizontal directions by the jaw support and the object, so therecan be no need for end point limits in the horizontal directions.Support bars 1455 can be coupled to the clamp bar and passing throughthe second jaw with large openings. Thus the second jaw can be freelymoved within the confinement of the openings. For example, the secondjaw cannot move too far down, since the support bar can prevent such asmovement. The openings 1456 can be configured to limit the movements ofthe second jaw. For example, the openings can be close or touching thesupport bars in horizontal directions, e.g., the openings can have anelongated shape in the up and down directions. The elongated openingscan prevent the second jaw from moving in directions parallel to the jawsupport, e.g., perpendicular to the up/down directions and perpendicularto the directions of toward to/away from the jaw support.

The second jaw assembly can be movably coupled to the clamp bar byhaving the jaw support movably coupled to the clamp bar, and the secondjaw flexibly coupled to the jaw support. For example, the jaw supportcan have a hollow space in which the clamp bar can pass through. Thedimension of the hollow space can be just about the size of the crosssection of the clamp bar, which can allow the jaw support to move alongthe clamp bar, with zero or minimum movements in other directions, suchas in directions perpendicular to the direction along the clamp bar.

The second jaw assembly can include a secure (locking) mechanism havingfirst mated component 1471, e.g., the cyclic pattern bar, and secondmated component 1472, e.g., the mating pattern component, for securing(locking) the jaw assembly, such as locking the jaw support, to theclamp bar. When the secure (locking) mechanism is disengaged, e.g., whenthe second mated component 1472 is pulled back to not contacting or notmating with the first mated component 1471, the jaw support 1442 can befreely moved along the clamp bar. When the secure (locking) mechanism isengaged, e.g., when the second mated component 1472 is pushed up tocontact or mate with the first mated component 1471, the jaw support1442 can be securely and fixedly coupled to the clamp bar.

The clamping device can include a pulling element 1443, which can beconfigured to be pulled on for lifting the clamped object. The pullingelement can be coupled to a rotatable element 1430, which is disposedbetween the second jaw and the jaw support. The pulling element can alsobe disposed between the clamp bar, e.g., between the multiple connectionbars. The pulling element can freely move in an up direction. In thedown direction, a spring set can be used to pull the pulling elementtoward the rotatable element.

The rotatable element can be configured to exert a clamping force on theobject when rotating, for example, through a slanting surface on therotatable element. For example, the jaw support can include a set ofrollers, which can provide rolling friction with the slanting surface ofthe rotatable element. Thus there can be minimum friction when therotatable element is rotating, pushing the second jaw away from the jawsupport due to the slanting surface.

The clamping device can include a second secure (locking) mechanism1435, which can be coupled to either the clamp bar or to the second jawassembly to prevent the rotatable element from being rotated. Therotatable element can be constrained from rotating, thus the secondsecure (locking) mechanism, when engaged, when secure the rotatableelement to the second jaw. The rotatable element can be locked to aposition of maximum jaw opening, which can provide that the second jawis closest to the jaw support.

In operation, the secure (locking) mechanism, e.g., the secure (locking)mechanism that locks the second jaw assembly to the clamp bar, can beunlocked, for example, by pulling back the second mated component 1472to disengage the second mated component 1472 from the first matedcomponent 1471. This will release the second jaw assembly from the clampbar, and thus the second jaw assembly can slide along the clamp bar sothat the distance between the two jaws can be large enough toaccommodate the object.

After putting the object within the first and second jaw, the secure(locking) mechanism can be engaged, e.g., the second mated component canbe pushed up to engage with the first mated component, locking thesecond jaw assembly to the clamp bar. If the secure (locking) mechanismis a discrete secure (locking) mechanism, there can be gaps between theobject and the jaws.

This process can be optional. In some embodiments, the second jawassembly can be secured to the clamp bar, and the clamping device can beconfigured to handle objects having a range of thicknesses, determinedby the movements of the second jaw.

Next, the second secure (locking) mechanism 1435, e.g., the secure(locking) mechanism that locks the pulling element to the clamp bar, canbe unlocked, so the pulling element can be pulled up. Due to therollers, the rotatable element can easily rotate against the jawsupport. The second jaw can move away from the jaw support, until thesecond jaw is in contact with the object. If there is a gap between theobject and the first jaw, the second jaw can keep moving to narrow thatgap. The second jaw then continue to move until the first and secondjaws all contact the object.

FIG. 14B (a)-(c) show an operation of the clamping device. In FIG. 14B(a), the rotatable element 1430 can be in a down most position, andoptionally locked by a secure (locking) mechanism. The second jaw 1441can be pulled toward the jaw support 1442. An object 1410 can be placedbetween the two jaws of the clamping device.

In FIG. 14B (b), the pulling element can be pulled up, for example, by ahoist 1470 hooking to the pulling element. The pulling on the pullingelement can rotate the rotatable element 1430, which can push the secondjaw toward the object for clamping the object. In FIG. 14B (c), furtherpulling on the pulling element can lift the object above the ground tomove to a new location.

FIGS. 15A-15B illustrate flow charts for forming and operating aclamping device according to some embodiments. In FIG. 15A, operation1500 forms a clamping device. The clamping device can include a firstjaw fixedly coupled to a clamp bar, and a second jaw assembly movablyand fixedly coupled to the clamp bar. The second jaw assembly caninclude a secure (locking) mechanism for fixedly coupling the second jawassembly to the clamp bar. The secure (locking) mechanism can beconfigured to secure the second jaw assembly to the clamp barcontinuously or at discrete locations.

In FIG. 15B, operation 1520 places an object between a first jaw and asecond jaw of a clamping device. The second jaw is part of a jawassembly. The jaw assembly further can include a secure (locking)mechanism for securing the jaw assembly with respect to the first jaw.The secure (locking) mechanism can be configured to secure the jawassembly at discrete locations.

Operation 1530 unlocks the secure (locking) mechanism to place an objectbetween the first jaw and the second jaw. Operation 1540 locks thesecure (locking) mechanism at a location to achieve a minimum gapbetween the first and second jaws with the object. Operation 1550 liftsthe clamping device to secure the object between the first and secondjaws. Operation 1560 lifts the clamping device to move the object.

In some embodiments, the present invention discloses a lock mechanism,and clamping device incorporating the lock mechanism. The clampingdevice can operate on force conversion principle, e.g., converting apulling force on the clamping device into a side force of the jaws forclamping on the object. In other words, there is a linkage between thevertical pulling force for lifting the clamping device and thehorizontal force pushing the jaws together. Thus, when the clampingdevice is pulled up, the linkage can cause the jaws to clamp on theobject, securing the object between the jaws for lifting and moving.

However, when the clamping device is empty, e.g., not clamping on anobject, pulling the clamping device also activates the linkage to movethe jaws together. Without the object, the jaws can be moved togetheruntil the distance between the jaws becomes a minimum distance, e.g.,the jaws cannot move any closer. This can cause difficulties for anempty clamping device to capture an object, e.g., additional action isneeded to separate the jaws before the object can be placed between thejaws.

In some embodiments, the present invention discloses a lock mechanismthat can activate or deactivate a linkage between the pulling action andthe side movements of the jaws. When the linkage is deactivated, thepulling element can lift the clamping device without moving the jaws.When the linkage is activated, lifting the pulling element can move thejaws sideward.

In some embodiments, the deactivation of the linkage can be performed byimmobilizing the rotatable element, for example, when the clampingdevice, after bringing an object to the destination, is ready to leave.Thus when the jaws are opened at a maximum distance, the rotatable isimmobilized, disconnecting the linkage between the pulling element andthe jaws.

The linkage can be re-activated when the clamping device, with the jawsseparated at a maximum distance, is positioned so that a new object isbetween the jaws. Thus, when the clamping device is pulled up, forexample, by pulling on the pulling element, the jaws move to clamp onthe object.

FIG. 16 illustrates a lock mechanism for a clamping device according tosome embodiments. A clamping device can include a first jaw 1660 fixedlycoupled to a clamp bar 1650. The clamping device can include a secondjaw 1641, which can be coupled to the clamp bar. A jaw support 1642 canbe fixedly and slidably coupled to the clamp bar 1650, e.g., the jawsupport can slide along the clamp bar, and then can be secured to theclamp bar.

The clamping device can include a rotatable element 1630, which can berotatably coupled to the jaw 1641, for example, through a set ofbearings such as ball bearings 1631. A pulling element 1643 can becoupled to the rotatable element 1630. When the pulling element ispulled up, the rotatable element can rotate. The rotatable element 1630can include a slanting interface, such as one or more spiral surfaces1632. Coupling with one or more rollers 1644 which is rotatably coupledto the jaw support 1642, the slanting interface can provide a linkagebetween the force pulling on the pulling element and the side forcemoving the jaw 1641. When the pulling element is pulled, the rotatableelement can rotate, which rolls the rollers on the slanting interface topush the jaw 1641 toward the other jaw 1660.

A locking mechanism 1680 can be included to limit movements of therotatable element, e.g., to prevent the rotatable element from rotatinga significant amount, which can move the jaws together. The rotatableelement can be secured to prevent any movement, or the rotatable elementcan have limited movements, for example, to allow the incorporation ofan auto lock mechanism. The limited movements can provide the jaw with alinear movement of less than a few millimeters, such as 5 mm or less, 3mm or less, 2 mm or less, or 1 mm or less. The limited movements canprovide the rotatable element with a rotational movement of less than afew degrees, such as 15 degrees or less, 10 degrees or less, 8 degreesor less, or 5 degrees or less.

The locking mechanism can include a pin 1681 which can be extended intoa mating hole 1682. When the pin is retracted, as shown in FIG. 16 (a),the rotatable element 1630 can be freely rotated with respect to the jaw1641. When the pin is extended, as shown in FIG. 16 (b), the rotatableelement 1630 is not freely rotatable.

FIGS. 17A-17B illustrate configurations for a locking mechanismaccording to some embodiments. A lock mechanism 1780 can in incorporatedinto a rotatable element 1730. The lock mechanism 1780 can include pin1781 and mating hole 1782. In FIG. 17A(a), the lock mechanism isdisengaged, with the pin away from the hole, and thus the rotatableelement 1730 can be freely rotated. FIGS. 17A (b)-(d) show a rotationalprocess of the rotatable element when the lock mechanism is disengaged.When the rotatable element rotates, rollers 1744 can roll on theslanting surface 1771, and can push the rotatable element away from therollers.

In FIG. 17B(a), the lock mechanism is engaged, with the pin engagingwith the hole, and thus the rotatable element 1730 cannot be freelyrotated. There can be limited movements of the rotatable element, sincethe pin and hole configuration can have some tolerance. FIG. 17B (b)shows that the rotatable element cannot be rotatable, thus fixing adistance between the rotatable element and the rollers.

In some embodiments, the present invention discloses an auto lockmechanism, and clamping device incorporating the auto lock mechanism. Inthe auto lock mechanism, the activation and deactivation of the linkagecan be performed automatically, for example, when a clamping devicecarrying the object has finished delivering the object, and when theempty clamping device contacts the object for clamping.

In some embodiments, the lock mechanism can be operated automatically,e.g., the lock mechanism can be operated by an operator operating theclamping device, such as operating a hoist coupled to a pulling elementof the clamping device. For example, the lock mechanism can be engagedto lock the rotatable element. When the clamping device engages with anobject, the engagement of the clamping device with the object candisengage the lock mechanism, allowing the jaws to move toward eachother for clamping on the object. When the clamping device carrying theobject reaches a destination, the clamping device can release theobject, e.g., enlarging the distance between the jaws to allow theobject to be released from the clamping device. The releasing of theobject by the clamping device, such as the jaw distance enlargingprocess, can engage the lock mechanism, preventing the rotatable elementfrom rotating any significant amount.

FIGS. 18A-18B illustrate operating processes for the auto lock mechanismaccording to some embodiments. FIGS. 18A(a)-(d) show a process for anempty clamping device 1800 to pick up an object. The clamping device issupported by a hoist coupled to the pulling element 1843, which can be aflexible line such as a steel cable, of the clamping device. In FIG.18A(a), the clamping device is brought to the object, e.g., positionedabove the object with the object located between the two jaws of theclamping device. The clamping device can have the auto lock mechanism1860 activated 1860A, meaning the rotatable element 1830 is secured, forexample, to a jaw so prevent the rotatable element from rotating. Thenon-rotating rotatable element can disable the linkage between thepulling element and the jaw, thus the jaws can be separated, forexample, at a maximum distance in order to accommodate the getting ofthe object between the opening of the jaws. The activation of the autolock mechanism can be accomplished after the clamping device finishesdelivering the object, as discussed in subsequent processes.

The auto lock mechanism can be activated when the separation of the twojaws of the clamping device is at a stopping distance, which can be amaximum distance, or close to a maximum distance, e.g., the jaws can befurther separated a little more. The stopping distance can be close tothe largest separation of the two jaws.

In FIG. 18A(b), the clamping device is lowered, for example, by loweringthe hoist. Since the jaws are widely separated, the object can be placedbetween the two jaws. The clamping device can touch the object, forexample, by a mechanism 1870 that links to the auto lock mechanism. Thecontacting of the mechanism 1870 can toggle the auto lock mechanism,e.g., activating the auto lock mechanism if the auto lock mechanism isdeactivated, and deactivating the auto lock mechanism if the auto lockmechanism is activated. Thus, the contacting of the mechanism by theclamping device when lowering to capture the object can deactivate 1860Bthe auto lock mechanism. The rotatable element can be free to rotatewhen the pulling element is pulled up.

In some embodiments, the contacting of the clamping device to theobject, e.g., a downward force or movement of the clamping device actingon the object can create an upward force or movement on the mechanism1870, which can partially deactivate the auto lock mechanism.

In FIG. 18A(c), the pulling element is pulled up, for example, by thehoist that is coupled to the pulling element. When the pulling elementis pulled up, the upward force or movement of the clamping device due togravity can create a downward force or movement on the mechanism 1870,which can complete the deactivation of the auto lock mechanism.

Since the auto lock mechanism is deactivated, further pulling on thepulling element by the hoist can rotate the rotatable element, which canmove the jaws toward each other for clamping on the object. The clampingdevice, characterized by the clamp bar and the two jaws, is stillstationary and in contact with the object. Only one end of the pullingelement, which is the end of the pulling element coupled to the hoist,is pulled up, unwinding the flexible line from the rotatable element torotate the rotatable element. The rotation of the rotatable element canmove a jaw toward the other jaw. When the two jaws contact the object,the rotation of the rotatable element can stop, and further pulling onthe pulling element can exert a clamping force on the object by thejaws.

In FIG. 18A(d), further pulling on the pulling element can lift theclamping device and the object clamped between the jaws of the clampingdevice. The clamping device can then be moved to a new location fordisposing the object.

FIGS. 18B(a)-(d) show a process for a clamping device 1800 holding anobject to release the object. In FIG. 18B(a), the clamping device withthe object clamped between the jaws is brought to a destination, e.g.,to a location that the object is to be placed. The clamping device canhave the auto lock mechanism 1860 deactivated 1860B, meaning therotatable element 1830 is free to rotate, and thus the linkage betweenthe pulling element and the jaw is enabled to move the jaws together forclamping on the object. The deactivation of the auto lock mechanism canbe accomplished after the clamping device finishes picking the object,as discussed in the previous processes.

In FIG. 18B(b), the clamping device is lowered to place the object onthe ground or any surface at the destination. The lowering of theclamping device can be accomplished by lowering the hoist coupled to thepulling element. After the object touches the ground, the hoist cancontinue to lower, thus lowering the pulling element without loweringthe clamping device. Since the auto lock mechanism is deactivated, aspring mechanism in the rotatable element, such as a spiral springcoupled to the rotatable element, can rotate the rotatable element andthus pull the pulling element down when the hoist is lowered. Therotation of the rotatable element can cause the jaws to be separated.

The pulling element is further pulled down, for example, by the spiralspring rotating the rotatable element, together with by the lowering ofthe hoist that is coupled to the pulling element. Since the auto lockmechanism is deactivated, rotating the rotatable element by the spiralspring can move the jaws away from each other. When the jaws reach amaximum separation (or when the rotatable element encounters a limitstop), the rotation of the rotatable element can stop.

The lowering of the pulling element, or the stopping of the rotatableelement can contact the mechanism 1870. The contacting of the mechanism1870 can activate the auto lock mechanism.

In some embodiments, the downward force or movement of the pullingelement or the rotatable element can create an upward force or movementon the mechanism 1870, which can partially activate the auto lockmechanism.

In FIG. 18B(c), the pulling element is pulled up, for example, by thehoist that is coupled to the pulling element. When the pulling elementis pulled up, the upward force or movement of the clamping device due togravity can create a downward force or movement on the mechanism 1870,which can complete the activation of the auto lock mechanism.

Since the auto lock mechanism is activated, further pulling on thepulling element by the hoist cannot rotate the rotatable element, e.g.,the activation of the auto lock mechanism can secure the rotatableelement, prevent the rotatable element from further rotating when thepulling element is further pulled up. The jaws are at a maximum (orclose to the maximum) separation.

In FIG. 18B(d), the pulling element is further pulled up, for example,by the hoist that is coupled to the pulling element. Since the auto lockmechanism is activated, pulling the pulling element cannot rotate therotatable element, thus the jaws are still separated at the maximumseparation, e.g., the previous separation when the auto lock mechanismis activated. The clamping device can be lifted up. Since the jaws areseparated, the object can be left on the ground, and the empty clampingdevice with the open jaws can be move to another location to pick upanother object.

The process can be continued, e.g., with moving the empty clampingdevice to approach an object for pick up.

In some embodiments, the present invention discloses an automaticlocking mechanism coupled to a clamping device, and a clamping deviceincorporating an automatic locking mechanism. The automatic lockingmechanism can toggle between an activation configuration and adeactivation configuration. The toggling process can mean that a sameaction sequence can be used for changing from an activationconfiguration to a deactivation configuration and vice versa, e.g., froma deactivation configuration to an activation configuration.

In the activation configuration, the locking mechanism is activated orengaged, which can prevent the jaws of the clamping device from movingtoward each other. In this configuration, the rotatable element can beprevented from rotating in the direction that causes the jaws to movetoward each other.

In the deactivation configuration, the locking mechanism is deactivatedor disengaged, which can allow the clamping device to operate normally.In this configuration, the rotatable element can rotate in eitherdirection, e.g., in a direction that can cause the jaws to move towardeach other and in an opposite direction that can cause the jaws to moveaway from each other.

FIGS. 19A-19I illustrate a process for the engagement and disengagementof a lock mechanism according to some embodiments. FIG. 19A shows aconfiguration of a rotatable element 1930 in a deactivation process ofthe locking mechanism, in which the jaws clamp on an object. Thisdeactivation configuration can be used when the clamping device, withthe object clamped between the jaws, starts moving up with the object,when the clamping device transports the object, and when the clampingdevice is lowered to bring the object to the ground. FIG. 19D shows anactivation configuration of the locking mechanism, in which therotatable element is prevented from moving in a direction that can allowthe jaws to move to clamp on the object. This activation configurationcan be used when the clamping device starts moving up to leave theobject on the ground, when the empty clamping device moves to differentlocation to pick up an object, and when the empty clamping device islowered to place the object between its open jaws.

FIGS. 19B(a) and 19B(b) show a configuration of a first portion of atwo-portion toggle process, which partially changes a deactivationconfiguration to an activation configuration of the locking mechanism.FIG. 19C shows a configuration of a second portion of the two-portiontoggle process, which completes the change from the deactivationconfiguration to the activation configuration of the locking mechanism.FIG. 19D shows an activation configuration of the locking mechanism, inwhich the rotatable element is prevented from rotating in the directionthat functions to clamp the jaws together.

FIG. 19E shows a configuration of the first portion of a two-portiontoggle process, which partially changes the activation configuration tothe deactivation configuration. FIGS. 19F(a) and 19F(b) show aconfiguration of the second portion of the two-portion toggle process,which completes the change from the activation configuration to thedeactivation configuration.

In some embodiments, the automatic locking mechanism can include alockable element and a receptacle configured to be mated to the lockableelement. Either the lockable element or the receptacle can be coupled tothe rotatable element, and the other component is coupled to a body ofthe clamping device, e.g., to a non-rotatable element near the rotatableelement, such as to the jaw support or the jaw.

The lockable element and the receptacle are configured to toggle therotatable element of the clamping device between a rotatableconfiguration, e.g., deactivation configuration of the automatic lockingmechanism, and a non-rotatable configuration, e.g., activationconfiguration of the automatic locking mechanism.

In the non-rotatable configuration or the activation configuration, thelockable element is coupled to the receptacle, which is to prevent therotatable element from rotating at least in the clamping direction,e.g., in the direction that causes the jaws to move toward each otherfor clamping on an object.

In the rotatable configuration or the deactivation configuration, thelockable element is decoupled from, e.g., not securely coupled to, thereceptacle, which allows the clamping device to operate normally, suchas to let the rotatable element to rotate in the clamping direction toclamp on the object.

In some embodiments, the toggling process can include two portions. Afirst portion can include rotating the rotatable element in theunclamping direction opposite the direction of the clamping direction,e.g., the unclamping direction is the direction that causes the jaws tomove away from each other. The rotation of the rotatable element in theunclamping direction can be performed by a tensioned spring assembly1935, which is coupled to the rotatable element and which is tensionedin the clamping direction. Thus, when the rotatable element is notrotating in the clamping direction or is not conditioned for notrotating, for example, by pulling on the pulling element 1943, thespring assembly 1935 can rotate the rotatable element in the unclampingdirection.

A second portion can include rotating the rotatable element in theclamping direction opposite the direction of the unclamping direction,e.g., the clamping direction is the direction that causes the jaws tomove toward each other. The rotation of the rotatable element in theclamping direction can be performed by pulling on the pulling element1943, which can be wrapped around the rotatable element in such as a wayso that when the pulling element is unraveled from the wrap aroundconfiguration, the rotatable element rotates in the clamping direction.

FIG. 19A shows a configuration of an automatic locking mechanism 1980,in which the receptacle 1982 can include a zigzag path, which can beformed in a component coupled to the rotatable element, such as on asurface of the rotatable element. The lockable element can include a rodelement 1981 configured to fit in the zigzag path 1982. The rod elementis coupled to the body of the clamping device, such as to the jaw or thejaw support which houses the axis or rotation of the rotatable element.

The zigzag path 1982 can include an entrance 1971 and an exit 1974. Insome embodiments, the rod element 1981 can travel in the zigzag path1982 in only one direction, such as from the entrance 1971 to the exit1975. The rod element 1981 can return from the exit to the entrance inanother path, such as traveling on an outer periphery of the rotatableelement.

The one way direction can be accomplished using a one way valve 1975coupled to an end of the zigzag path, such as the exit 1974, to allowthe lockable element to exit the zigzag path and to prevent the lockableelement from entering the zigzag path from the exit 1974.

Within the zigzag path, there can be a first abrupt turn 1972 nearer theentrance and a second abrupt turn 1973 nearer the exit. Thus the rodelement can enter the entrance 1971, encounter the first abrupt turn1973, encounter the second abrupt turn, and then exit at the exit 1974.

In some embodiments, the automatic locking mechanism 1980 can include aspring mechanism 1985 to bias the lockable element, e.g., the rodelement 1981, in a direction from the first abrupt turn 1972 toward thesecond abrupt turn 1973. e.g., in the direction that pushes the rodelement toward the center of the rotatable element, such as to contactthe periphery of the rotatable element if the rod element is outside ofthe rotatable element, pushing the rod element into the entrance of thezigzag path when the rod element is near the entrance, and pushing therod element toward the second abrupt turn when the rod element is at thefirst abrupt turn.

The spring mechanism 1985 can be applied to a rotatable level 1983,which has one end coupled to the rod element, and the opposite endcoupled to a fixed point on the body to form the axis of rotation forthe level 1983.

FIG. 19A can be a configuration when the clamping device is clamping onan object, and can be moved to a destination for releasing the object.This configuration can be viewed in FIG. 18B(a), showing a clampingdevice 1800 bringing an object to a destination, with the automaticlocking mechanism 1860 in unlocked or disengaged or deactivatedconfiguration 1860B.

FIGS. 19B(a) and 19B(b) show two snap shots of the first portion of thetwo portion toggling process. After a hoist moving the clamping devicehaving the object reaches the destination, the hoist coupled to one endof the pulling element 1943 lowers the clamping device until the objecttouches the ground.

Afterward, the hoist can continue to move down. The tension on thepulling element can be reduced since the object has touched the ground.The spring mechanism 1935 can then rotate the rotatable element in theunclamping direction 1937 to unclamp the object, e.g., to move the jawsaway from each other.

FIG. 19B(a) shows a snapshot of the rotation of the rotatable element,when the rod element moves past the exit of the zigzag path. Due to theone way valve, the rod element does not enter the exit, and keepstraveling on the outer periphery of the rotatable element.

The hoist can continue to move down, releasing tension on the pullingelement, which can lead to the spring mechanism 1935 to keep rotatingthe rotatable element in the unclamping direction 1937, until an end ofthe rotation, such as encountering a stop 1976. The stop can bepositioned so that the rod element is at a vicinity of the entrance ofthe zigzag path, such as passing the entrance of the zigzag path (FIG.19B(b)). This configuration can be viewed in FIG. 18B(b), showing thehoist lowers the pulling element to enlarge the separation between thejaws until the separation is at a maximum, such as when the rotation ofthe rotatable element encounters a limit stop.

Thus, the zigzag path can be configured so that when the entrance is ina vicinity of the rod element and the rotatable element rotates in theunclamping direction 1937, the entrance 1971 rotates past the rodelement 1981.

FIG. 19C shows the second portion of the two portion toggling process.After the rotatable element reaches the limit stop 1976, the hoist canpull up, pulling on the pulling element. The pulling on the pullingelement can rotate the rotatable element in a clamping direction 1938,which can re-tension the spring mechanism 1935.

Since the rod element 1981 is biased toward the zigzag path, e.g., thespring mechanism 1985 is configured to push the level 1983 carrying therod element 1981 toward an inner area on the rotatable element, the rodelement is pushed to enter the entrance 1971, and moved along the zigzagpath to rest on the first abrupt turn 1972. The first turn 1972 of thezigzag path is configured to function as a limit stop for the rodelement, e.g., the rod element cannot move further along the zigzag patheven when there is a high tension on the pulling element. Thus, therotatable element is constrained from further rotating in the clampingdirection 1938, which leads to the jaws remaining open at a maximum orclose to a maximum separation. The separation can be close to maximumseparation since the jaws can move toward each other a little when therod element moves from the outer periphery of the rotatable element,enters the entrance and rests at the first abrupt turn. The separationcan be maximum if the travelling of the rod element to reach the firstabrupt turn does not move the jaws, for example, due to tolerance orbacklash movement.

This configuration can be viewed in FIG. 18B(c), showing the hoistraises the pulling element to complete the activation of the automaticlocking mechanism 1860, to put the automatic locking mechanism into theactivation configuration 1860A.

Thus, the zigzag path can be configured so that when the entrance ispast the lockable element in the unclamping direction 1937 and therotatable element rotates in the clamping direction 1938, the zigzagpath rotates to accept the rod element 1981 into the entrance 1971 andstops at the first abrupt turn 1972.

FIG. 19D shows an activation configuration of the automatic lockingmechanism, in which the jaws of the clamping device are prevented frommoving toward each other. This can be accomplished by the rod element1981 stucked at the first abrupt turn 1972, which prevents the rotatableelement from rotating in the clamping direction 1938. The zigzag pathcan be configured so that when the rod element is at the first abruptturn, the rotatable element is prevented from rotating in the clampingdirection 1938,

After the automatic locking mechanism is activated, the jaws remain openat a maximum or close to maximum separation. The clamping device now canbe lifted up, for example, by raising the hoist coupled to the pullingelement. Sine the jaws are open, the object can be left behind, and theclamping device is lifted up empty.

This configuration can be viewed in FIG. 18B(d), showing the hoistraises the empty clamping device, with the automatic locking mechanismin the activation configuration 1860A.

The empty clamping device can move to pick up a new object. First, theempty clamping device is move to the object location, and can bepositioned so that the object is positioned within the open jaws. Thisconfiguration can be viewed in FIG. 18A(a), showing the hoist brings anempty clamping device with the open jaws to an object so that the objectis positioned in the opening of the jaws.

The hoist can move down to bring the clamping device down. After theclamping device contacts the object, the hoist can continue to movedown.

FIG. 19E shows the first portion of the two portion toggling process.After the clamping device contacts the object, further down movement ofthe hoist will slacken the pulling element, reducing the tension on thepulling element. The reduction in tension will allow the springmechanism 1935 to unwind, which can rotate the rotatable element in theunclamping direction 1937. The rotation of the rotatable element willcause the rod element to move from the first abrupt turn 1972 to thesecond abrupt turn 1973, since the rod element is biased toward thesecond abrupt turn. The spring mechanism 1985 can push on the level1983, which causes the rod element to rotate around the axis of rotation1984. Since the spring assembly is configured to push the rod element inthe direction from the first abrupt turn to the second abrupt turn, therod element can travel from the first abrupt turn to the second abruptturn, instead of returning to the entrance 1971 from the first abruptturn.

This configuration can be viewed in FIG. 18A(b), showing that after theclamping device contacts the object, the pulling element can be loweredfurther to partially deactivate the automatic locking mechanism 1860into the deactivation configuration 1960B.

The zigzag path can be configured so that when the lockable element isat the first abrupt turn and the rotatable element rotates in theunclamping direction 1837, the zigzag path rotates to guide the rodelement toward the second abrupt turn.

FIGS. 19F(a) and 19F(b) show two snap shots of the second portion of thetwo portion toggling process. In the first portion, after the hoistfurther moves down, after the clamping device contacts the object, toreduce tension on the pulling element, the spring mechanism 1935 can beunwound to rotate the rotatable element in the unclamping direction1937, which forms the first portion of the two portion toggling process.

The hoist can start move up, pulling on the pulling element. The pullingon the pulling element can rotate the rotatable element in the clampingdirection 1938, which can move the rod element from the second abruptturn to the exit of the zigzag path, since the rod element is biasedtoward the second abrupt turn. Since the spring assembly is configuredto push the rod element in the direction from the first abrupt turn tothe second abrupt turn, the rod element can travel from the secondabrupt turn to the exit, instead of returning to the first abrupt turnfrom the second abrupt turn.

At the exit, the rod element can push on the one way valve 1975 to leavethe zigzag path (FIG. 19F(a)). The pulling element can keep pulling, andthe rotatable element can keep rotating on the same clamping direction1938, to clamp on the object. The rod element can leave the exit of thezigzag path and travel on the outer periphery of the rotatable element(FIG. 19F(b)).

This configuration can be viewed in FIG. 18A(c), showing the pullingelement lifted up so that the jaws clamping on the object.

The zigzag path can be configured so that when the rod element is at thesecond abrupt turn and the rotatable element rotates in the clampingdirection, the zigzag path rotates to guide the rod element toward theexit. When the rod element is at the exit, the rotatable element isconfigured for further rotating in the clamping direction.

The pulling element can keep pulling until the jaws touch the object toclamp on the object (FIG. 19A). The clamping device is ready to belifted up by the hoist, with the object clamped between the jaws.

This configuration can be viewed in FIG. 18A(d), showing the clampingdevice listing the object from the ground.

In some embodiments, the zigzag path can be coupled to the body, such asforming a zigzag groove on a round portion of the body. The rod elementcan be coupled to the rotatable element, such as the axis of rotation1984 is positioned on the rotatable element. The operation of theautomatic locking mechanism can be similar to the configuration in whichthe rod element is coupled to the body and the zigzag path is coupled tothe rotatable element as shown in FIGS. 19A-19F.

In some embodiments, the present invention discloses a clamping devicehaving an automatic locking mechanism. The clamping device then canallow an operator to operate by controlling a hoist coupled to theclamping device, without leaving the hoist area. For example, by liftingand lowering the hoist, the clamping device can be toggled between anactivation configuration and a deactivation configuration, which canmake it easier to leave an object on the ground after being transport bythe clamping device, and which can make it easier to position an emptyclamping device on an object.

FIG. 19G shows the clamping device having an object 1910 clamped betweena jaw 1960 facing another jaw 1941. The jaw 1941 is coupled to amechanism, which can include a rotatable element 1930. The rotatableelement can have a slanting surface facing a stationary jaw support. Therotatable element can be configured to be rotatable around a center ofrotation on the jaw 1941. Thus the rotatable element is rotatable withrespect to the jaw 1941. Alternatively, the center of rotation can be onthe jaw support, and the rotatable element is coupled to the jawsupport, and can be rotatable with respect to the jaw support.

The mechanism can be configured for moving the jaw 1941 toward the jaw1960 when the rotatable element rotates in a clamping direction. Themechanism can be configured for moving the jaw 1941 away from the jaw1960 when the rotatable element rotates in an unclamping directionopposite to the clamping direction.

The clamping device can include a pulling element, which can be aflexible line, such as a steel cable. One end of the cable can becoupled to a hoist. The other end of the cable can be coupled to themechanism, such as to the rotatable element. The cable can be woundaround the rotatable element. The cable can be configured to rotate therotatable element when the end coupled to the hoist moves relative tothe center of rotation.

When a pulling element 1943 of the clamping device is pulled up, therotatable element is rotating. The rotation of the rotatable element canpush the jaw 1941 against the stationary jaw support toward the object,due to a slanting interface between the rotatable element and the jawsupport. The rotatable element can have a spring mechanism 1935tensioned in the clamping direction that moves the jaw 1941 toward thejaw 1960. Thus when the pulling element is relaxed, e.g., the tension onthe pulling element is reduced, the spring mechanism can rotate therotatable element in an opposite unclamping direction, which can retractthe jaw 1941 to rest on the jaw support.

The clamping device can include an auto lock mechanism 1980. In thisconfiguration, the auto lock mechanism is disengaged or deactivated orin a deactivation configuration, meaning the rotatable element 1930 isfree to rotate when the pulling element 1943 is pulled up in theclamping direction, or when the pulling element is released with thespiral spring 1935 providing a rotational force to rotate the rotatableelement in the opposite unclamping direction.

The auto lock mechanism 1980 can include a rod element such as a rod1981 and a mating hole path such as a zigzag path 1982. The rod 1981 canbe mounted on a bar 1983, which can be rotatable around a fixed axis1984. A spring mechanism, such as a linear spring 1985 or a spiralspring, can be used to push the rod toward the rotatable element, sothat the rod can rest and slide on an outer surface of the rotatableelement. Other configurations or variations can be used, such as pushrod configurations to form the auto lock mechanism.

FIGS. 19H(a) and (b) show a process in which the auto lock mechanism isengaged or activated, meaning the rotatable element is restricted fromfreely moving when the pulling element is pulled up. When the auto lockmechanism is engaged, the linkage between the pulling element 1943 andthe jaw 1941 is deactivated, since the rotatable element 1930 is nolonger allowed to rotate freely.

After reaching the destination, the clamping device is lowered, e.g., bylowering the pulling element, until the object touch the ground. Beforethe object touching the ground, the pulling element and the clampingdevice is coupled as a unit, e.g., the pulling element is stationaryrelative to the clamping device. The stationary pulling element cancause the rotatable element to also be stationary, with the jaw 1941clamping on the object.

After touching the ground, the pulling element is further lowered. Theclamping device is now stationary, thus the pulling element moves downrelative to the clamping device. Spring 1935 can cause the rotatableelement to rotate in the direction that opens the jaw 1941. Therotatable element can rotate so that the rod 1981 passes the path 1982,such as at or passing an entrance 1971 to the path 1982 (FIG. 19H(a)).The jaws are now at a maximum separation. The object is then separatedfrom the jaws, e.g., the jaws no longer clamp on the object.

The pulling element is raised up. The rising of the pulling element canbe gradually. The rotatable element can rotate slowly as the pullingelement is pulled up. The rotation of the rotatable element can causerod 1981 to slide within the path 1982, and can be stuck at a sharpcorner 1972, e.g., a first sharp or abrupt turn counting from theentrance 1971. The sharp corner can form a V shape with the rod slidingalong a branch of the V shape, and ending at the junction of the twobranches of the V shape. The sharp corner configuration can prevent therotatable element from any further rotation, and the jaws can be keptseparated, away from the object (FIG. 19H(b)).

The pulling element can be further raised up, pulling the clampingdevice up and away from the object. The stationary of the rotatableelement can keep the jaws separated, until the clamping element canapproach a new object. The separation of the jaws can allow the clampingdevice to place the new object between the two jaws.

FIGS. 19I(a) and (b) show a process in which the auto lock mechanism isdisengaged or deactivated, meaning the rotatable element can now freelymove. When the auto lock mechanism is disengaged, the linkage betweenthe pulling element 1943 and the jaw 1941 is re-activated, with thefreely-rotatable rotatable element 1930 acting as the intermediateelement between the pulling element and the jaw 1941.

After the clamping device is lowered to place a new object within theseparation of the jaws, the pulling element can be further lowered,e.g., even after the clamping device stops by already reaching the newobject. The lowering of the pulling element can push the rod 1981 out ofthe sharp corner 1972 in the auto lock mechanism path 1982. The rod thencan move to another opposite sharp corner 1973, e.g., a second sharp orabrupt turn counting from the entrance 1971, such as a V shape cornerthat is in opposite direction with the first sharp corner 1972 (FIG.19I(a)).

The pulling element can now be raised up. The pull on the pullingelement can rotate the rotatable element, which can slide the rod 1981out of the sharp corner 1973, e.g., following a second branch of the Vshape, to get the rod at the end 1974 or the exit of the path 1982 (FIG.19I(b)). The first sharp corner and the second sharp corner on the path1982 form a zigzag pattern, making the path 1982 looks like a zigzagpath, e.g., a zigzag-like path. Portion of the zigzag path can be curvedor bend, for example, to reduce the path portion within the rotatableelement.

The rod is now contacting the outer edge of the rotatable element, whichcan freely rotate to move the jaw 1941 toward the object for clamping onthe object (back to FIG. 19G).

After the jaws clamp on the object, further pulling the pulling elementcan also raise the clamping device and the object, which can then liftand move the object to a new location.

The process can continue, with the auto lock mechanism engaged to keepthe jaws from moving and disengaged to keep the jaws clamping on theobject.

In some embodiments, the auto lock mechanism can include a rod and azigzag-like path on a rotatable element. The path can have an entrance,such as entrance 1971, from an outer periphery. The path can have anexit, such as exit 1974, to the outer periphery.

The path can be a one-way path, e.g., having door or configured so thatthe rod can travel in one direction, such as from the entrance to theexit. For example, at the exit, there can be a spring-loaded door orobstacle that can open or overcome only from inside the path, e.g., therod can exit the path through the spring-loaded door or obstacle, but onthe return, the rod can slide pass or over the door or obstacle withoutbeing able to get into the path through the exit. The path and the rodcan also be configured to provide the one-way path. For example, thepath can include a horizontal V shape or an Z shape. The rod can beconnected to a spring, e.g., through a pivotable arm, that push the rodin one direction, such as downward. Thus, when reaching the horizontal Vshape or the Z shape, the rod can be pushed down by the spring to enterthe down portion of the horizontal V shape or the Z shape, and notreturning to the original path. The branch configuration and the springaction can make the path one way, e.g., the rod can follow the pathwithout returning to the original path.

The path can include a stopping location, e.g., a location at which therod is prevented from further traveling without back tracking. Forexample, the stopping location can include a corner, e.g., a straight orround corner making an angle less than 180 or 90 degrees with thedirection of travel along the path at the stopping location, such as a Vshape corner or a rounded V shape corner. The stopping location can stopthe rotating movement of the rotatable element, e.g., the rotatableelement cannot continue to rotate without first reversing direction, orat least first stopping to wiggle the rod out of the stopping location.

Alternatively, the stopping location can include a turn on the path withthe portion of the path after the turn making an angle greater than 90degrees with respect to the relative moving direction of the rod, suchas the movement direction of rotatable element at the rod location inthe stopping location.

FIGS. 20A-20E illustrate configurations for an auto lock mechanismaccording to some embodiments. A rotatable element 2030 can include apath 2082, which can enter the rotatable element, making a few turns,such as zigzag turns, and then exiting the rotatable element. The pathcan be configured to accept a rod 2081 from a rod assembly.

In FIG. 20A, the path 2082 can be configured to provide a one-way travelfor the rod, including a first stopping location, e.g., a first sharp orabrupt turn, which can prevent the rod for further travelling in thepath without first back tracking. There can be a second stoppinglocation, e.g., a second sharp or abrupt turn, to guide the path back tothe exit. Thus, when the rod is disposed outside the path, the rotatableelement is free to rotate. When the rod enters the path, the rod can bestopped at the first stopping location, preventing the rotatable elementfrom any further rotation. After back tracking the rotatable element,the rotatable element then can rotate forward to let the rod out of thepath. The rotatable element is then free to move again.

The path can be a one way path at the entrance 2071 and exit 2074 byhaving the entrance and exit portions tangential or forming an acuteangle with a tangent of the periphery of the rotatable element. Forexample, a portion of the rotatable element can have a shape of acylinder, and the rod can rest on the cylinder outer shape, with aspring mechanism to push the rod toward the cylinder shape. The springcan be a linear, e.g., straight, spring, or a spiral spring.

The entrance and exit can form an acute angle, e.g., an angle less than90 degrees, with the tangent vector in the direction of the one way. Forthe entrance, the acute angle formation can be adequate to ensure a oneway travel, since the counterclockwise rotation of the rotatable element(or relative clockwise movement of the rod) will let the rod passing theentrance. On the opposite direction, e.g., on the clockwise rotation ofthe rotatable element (or relative counterclockwise movement of therod), the rod can enter the entrance.

For the exit, the acute angle formation can allow easy of movements forthe rod, in both two ways travel.

FIGS. 20B(a) and (b) show a configuration for the path to be one waypath at the exit of the path. When the rotatable element rotates in onedirection, such as a clockwise direction (FIG. 20B(a)), the rod canleave the exit to stay at a periphery of the rotatable element. When therotatable element rotates in the opposite direction, such as thecounterclockwise direction (FIG. 20B(b), the rod can bypass the exit tokeep on the periphery of the rotatable element.

FIGS. 20C(a) and (b) show configurations for the path to be one way pathat the exit of the path. In FIG. 20C(a), a one-way door 2075 can bedisposed at the exit of the path. The door can be hinged at one end. Thedoor can have a spring pulling the door downward, e.g., counterclockwiseas shown. Thus the door can be opened from inside the path, by forcingthe spring to extend by the rod. After the rod leaving the exit, thespring can pull the door shut to prevent the rod from re-entering theexit from the outside.

In FIG. 20C(b), a one-way obstacle 2085 can be disposed at the exit ofthe path. The obstacle can be disposed on the path near the exit of thepath. The obstacle can be hinged at one end. The obstacle can have aspring pushing the obstacle to block the path, e.g., pushing theobstacle to the right as shown. Thus the obstacle can be overcome frominside the path, by compressing the spring by the rod. After the rodleaving the exit, the spring can push the obstacle back to prevent therod from re-entering the exit from the outside.

As shown, the obstacle can block the path with a hinge perpendicular tothe surface of the rotatable element. Other configurations can be used,such as an obstacle having a hinge parallel to the surface of therotatable element. As shown, the springs are linear or straight springs,but other configurations can be used, such as spiral springs, ornon-spring action elements such as rubber elements or hydraulicelements.

Further, other configurations to form a one-way exit for the path can beused, such as a gradually narrow portion of the path at the exit point,thus the rod can be forced through the exit, but on the reverse path,the rod will just pass through the exit without entering the path.

FIG. 20D(a) shows a configuration for the first stopping location on thepath. When the rotatable element rotates in one direction, such as aclockwise direction, actuated by pulling the pulling element, the rodcan travel from the entrance to the first stopping location 2072, andthen stopped at the first stopping location, which can prevent therotatable from any further rotation. Thus, the rotatable element canstop rotating when the rod reaches the first stopping location. Thisaction can disable the linkage between the pulling element and therotation of the rotatable element, and which can prevent the jaws fromapproaching each other.

FIGS. 20D(b) and 20E(b) show configurations for the path to be one waypath based on a spring mechanism acting on the rod assembly. The springmechanism activated by the spring 2085 can push the rod downward, e.g.,in the direction toward the rotatable element. Thus, the rod is morelikely to follow the lower branch, e.g., the branch toward the center ofthe rotatable element, when reaching a path divider with two possiblepath portions.

The rod can stay at or near the entrance to the path. When the rotatableelement rotates in one direction, such as the counterclockwisedirection, the rod can stay at the periphery of the rotatable element,since the entrance forms an acute angle with the tangential direction ofthe relative travel of the rod.

When the rotatable element rotates in the opposite direction, such asthe clockwise direction as shown in FIG. 20D(b), the rod can either stayon the outer periphery of the rotatable element, or the rod can enterthe entrance portion of the path. Due to the spring mechanism pushingthe rod downward, the rod can enter the entrance portion of the path toreach the stopping location.

The rod can stay at the stopping location of the path. When therotatable element tries to rotate in one direction as shown in FIG.20D(a), such as the clockwise direction, the rod can stop the rotatableelement from rotating.

When the rotatable element rotates in the opposite direction, such asthe counterclockwise direction as shown in FIG. 20E(b), the rod caneither return on the path to the entrance, or the rod can enter the newdownward or lower branch of the path. Due to the spring mechanismpushing the rod downward, the rod can enter the downward portion of thepath, e.g., on the one way travel of the path.

FIG. 20E(a) shows another configuration to prevent the rod fromreturning to the entrance at the stopping location. A spring door orobstacle 2087 can be used to block the return path, forcing the rod tofollow the downward lower branch of the path to the exit. The springdoor or obstacle can be configured to allow the rod to travel from theentrance to the stopping location, and prevent the return of the rod.

Other configurations to form a one-way travel at the stopping locationcan be used, such as a gradually narrow portion of the path at thestopping location, thus the rod can be forced through to the stoppinglocation, but on the reverse path, the rod will just pass through to theexit without returning to the entrance. Further, the obstacle can havedifferent configurations for the hinges and the springs.

In some embodiments, the zigzag path can be coupled to the body, such asforming a zigzag groove on a round portion of the body. The rod elementcan be coupled to the rotatable element, such as the axis of rotation1984 is positioned on the rotatable element. The operation of theautomatic locking mechanism can be similar to the configuration in whichthe rod element is coupled to the body and the zigzag path is coupled tothe rotatable element as shown in FIGS. 19A-19I.

FIGS. 21A-21C illustrate flow charts for operating a clamping devicehaving an auto lock mechanism according to some embodiments. In FIG.21A, operation 2100 toggles a locking mechanism of a clamping device bylowering and then raising a hoist coupled to the clamping device. Thelocking mechanism can include a locking position in which at least a jawof two jaws of the clamping device is unmovable when the hoist iscontinued to be raised and an unlock position in which the jaw ismovable toward the other jaw when the hoist is continued to be raised.

The locking mechanism can be coupled to a jaw, or to an intermediatelinkage between the jaw and an element of the clamping device that iscoupled to the hoist for moving the clamping device.

In FIG. 21B, operation 2120 lowers a hoist for moving a jaw of aclamping device. The hoist can be coupled to an element of the clampingdevice. The element can be coupled to the jaw through a linkagemechanism, so that when the element is lowered, the jaw can be moved.

Operation 2130 raises the hoist. The jaw can be toggled between beingmovable and being unmovable when the hoist is continued to be raised.The toggling process can be accomplished be an auto lock mechanism thatenables or disables the linkage mechanism between the element and thejaw.

In FIG. 21C, operation 2150 lowers a hoist for moving a clampingmechanism in one direction. The clamping mechanism causes a jaw of aclamping device to move.

Operation 2160 raises the hoist for moving the clamping mechanism in anopposite direction. The clamping mechanism is toggled between the jawbeing movable and the jaw being unmovable when the hoist is continued tobe raised.

FIGS. 22A-22B illustrate flow charts for operating a clamping devicehaving an auto lock mechanism according to some embodiments. When ahoist coupled to a clamping device is lowered, the jaws can be separatedfrom each other due to a linkage between the jaws and an element of theclamping device, such as a pulling element. When the hoist is lowered sothat the separation between the jaws reaches a predetermined distance,such as a maximum separation, the auto lock mechanism can be toggledwhen the hoist starts to raise the element up, or when the element israised up a distance by the hoist. The auto lock mechanism can togglebetween a unlock position, in which the jaws are movable when theelement is pulled up, and a lock position, in which the jaws are notmovable (or only movable a short distance) when the element is pulledup.

In FIG. 22A, operation 2200 lowers a hoist coupled to a clamping device.The clamping device is lowered together with the hoist. Two jaws of theclamping device are separated at a distance. Operation 2210 continuinglylowers the hoist. At least a jaw of the two jaws moves to increase adistance between the jaws, until the jaw reaches a position. Operation2220 raises the hoist to activate a toggling mechanism for securing thejaw. Operation 2230 continuingly raises the hoist. The jaws remainseparated since the toggling mechanism has been activated from movablejaw to secured jaw.

In FIG. 22B, operation 2240 lowers a hoist coupled to a clamping device.The clamping device is lowered together with the hoist. Operation 2250continuingly lowers the hoist. At least a jaw of two jaws of theclamping device moves to enlarge a distance between the two jaws.Operation 2260 continuingly lowers the hoist until the jaw reaches aposition. Operation 2270 raises the hoist to activate a togglingmechanism for securing the jaw. Operation 2280 continuingly raises thehoist.

FIGS. 23A-23B illustrate flow charts for operating a clamping devicehaving an auto lock mechanism according to some embodiments. When ahoist coupled to a clamping device is lowered, with the jaws separatedfrom each other due to an auto lock mechanism dissociating a linkagebetween the jaws and an element of the clamping device, such as apulling element. The hoist can be lowered so that an object is placedbetween the separated jaws. The contact between the clamping device andthe object can have an effect on the auto lock mechanism, in such as away so that the auto lock is partially released. The auto lock mechanismcan be fully released, e.g., toggling from the lock position to anunlock position, when the hoist starts to raise the element up. The autolock mechanism is then toggled between a lock position, in which thejaws are not movable (or only movable a short distance) when the elementis pulled up, and a unlock position, in which the jaws are movable whenthe element is pulled up.

In FIG. 23A, operation 2300 moves a clamping device to approach anobject. A hoist coupled to the clamping device, for example, through asteel cable, is lowered so that the clamping device contacts the object.The clamping device can be configured to have two jaws fixedlyseparated. The object can be disposed between the two jaws. The hoistcan lower the cable to place the second object between the two jaws.Operation 2310 continuingly lowers the hoist to activate a togglingmechanism, e.g., to bring the automatic locking mechanism from aprevious activation configuration to a deactivation configuration. Thetoggling mechanism releases a lock that prevents at least one of the twojaws from moving. For example, after the clamping device contacts thesecond object, the hoist can further lower the cable to rotate therotatable element in the unclamping direction until the automaticlocking mechanism is partially activated.

Operation 2320 raises the hoist to further activate a clamping mechanismthat can be configured to move the jaws together for clamping on theobject. Activating the clamping mechanism is the same as deactivatingthe automatic locking mechanism, which does not lock the rotatableelement, and which allows the clamping mechanism to operate to move thejaws together. For example, the hoist can raise the cable up to rotatethe rotatable element in the clamping direction to complete thedeactivation of the automatic locking mechanism, after the automaticlocking mechanism is partially deactivated by the previous step. Thecomplete deactivation of the automatic locking mechanism toggles therotatable element from the non-rotatable configuration to the rotatableconfiguration.

Operation 2330 continuingly raises the hoist to raise the clampingdevice and the object. The object is secured between the two jaws due tothe clamping mechanism. For example, the hoist can continuing raises thecable up to rotate the rotatable element in the clamping direction tomove the jaws together, such as moving one jaw toward the other jaw,until the jaws clamp on the object. After the jaws clamp on the object,the hoist can lift up, and move the clamping device while the clampingdevice clamps on the object to a destination.

In FIG. 23B, operation 2350 lowers a hoist coupled to a clamping deviceclamping on an object so that the object touches a surface, such as theground. The object is clamped between two jaws of the clamping device.The hoist can be coupled to a steel cable wrapped around a rotatableelement of the clamping device.

Operation 2360 continuingly lowers the hoist to enlarge a distancebetween the two jaws. After the object touches the ground, the hoistcontinues to lower the cable. The tension on the cable is reduced, and aspring mechanism coupled to the rotatable element acts to rotate therotatable element in the unclamping direction to separate the two jawsto loosen a grip on the object. When the jaws are separated at apredetermined distance, such as at or close to a maximum distancedetermined by a limit stop, the automatic locking mechanism coupled tothe clamping device can be partially activated.

Operation 2370 lifts the hoist to activate a toggling mechanism, e.g.,to bring the automatic locking mechanism from a previous deactivationconfiguration to an activation configuration. The toggling mechanism,which moves the automatic locking mechanism to the activationconfiguration, activates a lock that prevents at least one of the twojaws from moving. The hoist can raise the cable up to rotate therotatable element in the clamping direction to complete the activationof the automatic locking mechanism. The activation of the automaticlocking mechanism prevents the rotatable element from rotating furtherin the first direction.

Operation 2380 continues to raise the hoist to raise the clamping devicewithout the object. The object is separated from the clamping device dueto the distance between the two jaws larger than a dimension of theobject. The hoist can continue to raise the cable up to raise theclamping device. The jaws of the clamping device remain open due to thenon-rotatable configuration of the rotatable element, leaving the objecton the ground.

FIGS. 24-26 illustrate additional views of the clamping device accordingto some embodiments. A clamping device can include a first jaw assemblyand a second jaw assembly disposed in substantially perpendicular with aclamp bar. The clamp bar can include multiple bars, which can be coupledto the first and second jaw assembly. The first jaw assembly can befixedly coupled to the clamp bar. The second jaw assembly can also befixedly coupled to the clamp bar. Alternatively, the second jaw assemblycan be movably coupled to the clamp bar, such as moving along the clampbar, and then secured to the clamp bar, for example, by a lockingmechanism.

The clamping device can include a rotatable element, which can becoupled to a jaw assembly. For example, the jaw assembly can include ajaw facing a jaw support. The rotatable element can be disposed betweenthe jaw and the jaw support, and can be rotatably coupled to a componentof the jaw assembly, such as to the jaw. A pulling element can becoupled to the rotatable element to rotate the rotatable element in onedirection. A return mechanism, such as a spiral spring assembly, can beused to rotate the rotatable element in an opposite direction.

An interface between the rotatable element and a component of the jawassembly, such as the jaw support can include a slanting surface, whichcan be configured so that when the rotatable element is rotated in thedirection caused by the pulling of the pulling element, the jaw ismoving away from the jaw support if there is no obstacle blocking themovement of the jaw. If an object is already present between the jaws ofthe clamping device, the slanting surface can convert the action ofpulling the pulling element to an action, e.g., a force, pushing on thejaw, to clamp on the object.

The slanting interface can include one or more spiral surfaces coupledto the rotatable element, and one or more rollers coupled to a componentof the jaw assembly, such as to the jaw support.

FIG. 24 shows a perspective view of the clamping device. A clampingdevice 2400 can include a first jaw 2460 which is coupled to a clamp bar2450. A rubber pad 2465 can be coupled to the first jaw to increasefriction with clamped objects. A jaw assembly including a second jaw2441 and a jaw support 2442 can be coupled to the clamp bar. A rubberpad 2445 can be coupled to the second jaw to increase friction withclamped objects.

A rotatable element 2430 can be disposed between the second jaw and thejaw support. The rotatable element can be rotatably coupled to thesecond jaw, and can have slanting interfaces with the jaw support. Therotatable element can have spiral surfaces, interfacing with rollers inthe jaw support. The rollers can roll on the spiral surfaces of therotatable element.

A pulling element 2443 can have one end fixedly coupled to the rotatableelement, and wrapped around the rotatable element. Thus, when thepulling element is pulled up, the rotatable element can rotate, whichcan rotate the spiral surfaces on the rollers, moving the rotatableelement relative to the jaw support. The other end of the pullingelement can include a coupled, such as a hook, for coupling with a hoistfor moving the clamping device.

The clamping device can include other components, such as an auto lockmechanism for enabling or disabling a linkage between the pullingelement and the second jaw. For example, the auto lock mechanism canallow or prevent the rotatable element from rotating, thus pulling onthe pulling element can rotate or non-rotate the rotatable element.

FIGS. 25A-25B show internal views of a clamping device according to someembodiments. A clamping device can include a first jaw 2560 facing asecond jaw 2541. A rotatable element 2530 can be rotatably coupled tothe second jaw, for example, through ball bearings. A pulling element2543 can be coupled to the rotatable element, and can rotate therotatable element, when pulled, in one direction, such ascounterclockwise as shown. Spring assembly 2535 can be coupled betweenthe rotatable element and the second jaw to rotate the rotatable elementin an opposite direction, for example, when the pulling element is notpulled or released.

The rotatable element can include slanting surface, such as spiralsurfaces 2571, which can change a distance between the rotatable elementand a jaw support (not shown). An auto lock mechanism 2580 can becoupled to the rotatable element. The auto lock mechanism can be fixedlycoupled to the second jaw, and can function to allow or to prevent therotatable element from rotating.

FIGS. 26A-26B show internal views of a clamping device according to someembodiments. A pulling element 2643 can be coupled to a rotatableelement 2630. For example, one end 2633 of the pulling element can befixedly coupled to the rotatable element. Thus, when the pulling elementis pulled up, the rotatable element can rotate, such as in a clockwisedirection as shown. A spring assembly 2635 can be used to rotate therotatable element in an opposite direction, when the pulling element isrelaxed.

A limiter 2632 can be used to limit the amount of rotation. For example,as shown, the rotatable element can rotate at most about 180 degrees.Rollers 2631 can be included to reduce friction between the rotatableelement and a jaw support (not shown). The rotatable element can includeslanting surface, such as spiral surfaces 2671. There can be 2 spiralsurfaces, thus the rotatable element can obtain a maximum separationwith the jaw support when rotating about 180 degrees.

An auto lock mechanism 2680 can couple the rotatable element with asecond jaw (not shown). The auto lock mechanism can include a pin handle2681, which can be spring loaded to be pressed against the rotatableelement. A path 2682 can be included in the rotatable element togenerate the auto lock feature, including a stopping location, and oneway travel from an entrance to an exit.

In some embodiments, the present invention discloses an auto lockmechanism for a clamping device. The clamping device can be used forlifting and moving objects, such as plates like glass plates, or graniteplates. The clamping device can have two opposing jaws configured toclamp on an object. A pulling element is coupled to at least one of thejaws, for actuating and de-actuating the clamping actions of the jaws.For example, when the pulling element moves up, e.g., relative to thejaws, for example, the jaws are clamping together for securing theobject disposed between the jaws. When the pulling element moves down,the jaws are moving apart for releasing the object between the jaws.Generally, the relative movements of the pulling element, e.g., themovements of the pulling element with respect to at least anotherelement of the clamping device, occur when the clamping device isstationary, such as when the clamping device is on the ground, or whenthe clamping device already contacts an object for lifting, or when theclamping device rests an object at a destination. The pulling elementcan be moved, but not relative to other elements of the clamping device,when the whole clamping device is moved, for example, when an emptyclamping device is moved to approach an object for grasping, or when aclamping device having an object in its grasp is on the process oftransferring the object.

The auto lock mechanism can automatically disable or enable the couplingor the linkage between the pulling element and the jaw or jaws. Theautomatic disabling or enabling can simplify the actions of the clampingdevice, such as allowing operating the clamping device with a singleoperator.

FIGS. 27A-27F illustrate configurations of clamping devices according tosome embodiments. FIG. 27A shows a schematic for a clamping device 2700,including two jaws 2760 and 2730 for clamping on an object. The clampingdevice can include a pulling element 2710, which can be coupled with atleast one of the jaws, such as jaw 2730, through a linkage mechanism2750. The linkage mechanism can be configured so that when the pullingelement is moved, relative to the jaw, the jaw is moved in a differentdirection. For example, when the pulling element moves up 2720, the jawcan move 2740 toward the opposite jaw. The linkage mechanism can alsofunction as a clamping mechanism, for example, by pulling on the pullingelement, the jaw can exert a force on an object disposed between the twojaws for clamping on the object. After the object is clamped, furtherpulling on the pulling element can lift the clamping device, e.g., thepulling element is moved up together with other components of theclamping device, and not relative to the jaw or to other components ofthe clamping device.

Different clamping devices can be formed using different linkagemechanisms between the pulling element and the jaw. For example, thelinkage mechanisms can include a scissor mechanism, a half scissormechanism, a slanting interface mechanism including flat slantingsurfaces or curved or spiral surfaces.

FIG. 27B shows a clamping device having a scissor mechanism. Theclamping device 2701 can have two movable jaws caused by a scissoraction of a scissor clamp. The clamping device can include one or moresets of clamping jaws, which can increase a gripping action on theobject without increasing clamping pressures on the object.

In general, the clamping device can have two arm portions 2711 and 2731,having one ends coupled together through a fixed pivotal point 2751. Thefree end of the top arm portion 2711 can be lifted up 2721 or moveddown. When lifted up or moved down, the pivotal linkage 2751 can movethe free end of the bottom arm 2731. The free end of the bottom armportion 2731 can be coupled to the jaws of the clamping device. Themovements of the free end of the bottom arm 2731 can move 2741 the jawsto clamp on an object, e.g., the jaws moving toward each other, or torelease the object, e.g., the jaws moving away from each other.

For example, when the free end of the top arm portion moves up 2721, thepivotal linkage can cause the jaws to move 2741 toward each other forclamping on the object. When the free end of the top arm portion movesdown, the pivotal linkage can cause the jaws to move away from eachother for releasing the object.

The clamping device 2701 is shown without an object, and with thelinkage mechanism between the two portions of the scissor armsactivated. The clamping device can be lifted up 2721. The lifting actioncauses the jaws to move together 2741. When the clamping device ispositioned near an object for pick up, the closeness of the jaws canmake it difficult to move the clamping device down to clamp on theobject. Thus, an auto lock mechanism can be included to disable thelinkage mechanism for empty clamping device for easy of picking objects.

The object can be disposed between the open jaws of the clamping device.The auto lock mechanism can re-enable the linkage mechanism. The pullingelement of the clamping device can be lifted up, causing the jaws tosecurely clamp the object. The clamping device can then move the objectto a desired location. When the clamping device reaches a targetposition, the clamping device can move down to position the object onthe ground. The pulling element of the clamping device can move furtherdown so that the jaws open for releasing the object, due to theactivation of the linkage mechanism. When the clamping device lifts upto move to other locations, the lifting up action can cause the jaws toclamp again on the object, which can present difficulty to move theclamping device and leaving the object at the destination. The auto lockmechanism can disable the linkage mechanism for empty clamping devicewith open jaws for easy of leaving objects at destinations.

FIG. 27C shows a clamping device having a half scissor mechanism. Theclamping device 2702 can have a fixed jaw disposed opposed to a movablejaw caused by a scissor action of the clamping device. The set ofclamping jaws with a fixed jaw and a movable jaw can reduce movements ofthe objects, which can be useful for fragile objects.

The clamping device can further include one or more sets of clampingjaws, which can increase a gripping action on the object withoutincreasing clamping pressures on the object. The low clamping pressuredue to the multiple clamping jaw sets can be useful in clamping lowfriction and fragile objects, such as glass plates.

In general, the clamping device can have two arm portions 2712 and 2732,having one ends coupled together through a fixed pivotal point 2752. Thefree end of the top arm portion 2712 can be lifted up or moved down.When lifted up or moved down, the pivotal linkage 2752 can move the freeend of the bottom arm 2732. The free end of the bottom arm portion 2732can be coupled to the jaws of the clamping device. The movements of thefree end of the bottom arm 2732 can move the jaws to clamp on an object,e.g., the jaws moving toward each other, or to release the object, e.g.,the jaws moving away from each other.

For example, when the free end of the top arm portion moves up 2722, thepivotal linkage can cause one jaw to move 2742 toward the other jaw forclamping on the object. When the free end of the top arm portion movesdown, the pivotal linkage can cause the jaw to move away from the otherjaw for releasing the object.

The clamping device can include other components, such as a guidingmechanism for moving the jaw sets to the object. The jaw sets can havean opening for the object to enter. The guiding mechanism can assist theobject, e.g., guiding the object to enter the openings between the jawsof the jaw sets. The clamping device can include a contact mechanism tovisually detecting the object, for example, when the scissor clamp movestoward the object for clamping. The contact mechanism can be particularuseful for transparent objects, such as glass plates, which can bedifficult for the operator to see the edge of the plates. The scissorclamp can include roller feet for rolling the scissor clamp, forexample, for moving between places on the ground.

The clamping device 2702 is shown without an object, and with thelinkage mechanism between the two portions of the scissor armsactivated. The clamping device can be lifted up 2722. The lifting actioncauses the jaws to move together 2742. When the clamping device ispositioned near an object for pick up, the closeness 2730 of the jawscan make it difficult to move the clamping device down to clamp on theobject. Thus, an auto lock mechanism can be included to disable thelinkage mechanism for empty clamping device for easy of picking objects.

The object can be disposed between the open jaws of the clamping device.The auto lock mechanism can re-enable the linkage mechanism. Theclamping device can clamp on the object, and deliver the object to adesired location. Afterward, the pulling element of the clamping devicecan move further down so that the jaws can release the object. When theclamping device lifts up to move to other locations, the lifting upaction can cause the jaws to clamp again on the object, which canpresent difficulty to move the clamping device and leaving the object atthe destination. The auto lock mechanism can disable the linkagemechanism for empty clamping device with open jaws for easy of leavingobjects at destinations.

FIG. 27D shows a clamping device having a pulling element havingslanting interfaces. The clamping device can have two movable jawscaused by a moving action of the pulling element due to the slantinginterfaces. For example, the pulling element can have a triangular shapewith two slanting surfaces at the sides of the triangle. The slantingsurfaces can interface with arms of the linkage mechanism, so that whenthe pulling element moves up, the arms can move the jaws toward eachother. The clamping device can include one or more sets of clampingjaws, which can increase a gripping action on the object withoutincreasing clamping pressures on the object.

As shown, the clamping device 2703 can have two arm portions 2713 and2733, having one ends coupled together through a fixed pivotal point2753. The free end of the top arm portion 2713 can swing right or left,due to the up or down action of the pulling element at the slantinginterfaces, respectively. When swing right or left, the pivotal linkage2753 can move the free end of the bottom arm 2733. The free end of thebottom arm portion 2733 can be coupled to the jaws of the clampingdevice. The movements of the free end of the bottom arm 2733 can movethe jaws to clamp on an object, e.g., the jaws moving toward each other,or to release the object, e.g., the jaws moving away from each other.

For example, when the pulling element moves up 2723, the larger size ofthe pulling element can cause the free end of the top arm portion towing to the right. Due to this action, the pivotal linkage can cause thejaws to move 2743 together for clamping on the object. When the pullingelement moves down, the smaller size of the pulling element can causethe free end of the top arm portion to swing to the left. Due to thisaction, the pivotal linkage can cause the jaws to move away from eachother for releasing the object.

The clamping device 2703 is shown without an object, and with thelinkage mechanism between the two portions of the scissor armsactivated. The clamping device is lifted up 2723. The lifting actioncauses the jaws to move together 2743. When the clamping device ispositioned near an object for pick up, the closeness of the jaws canmake it difficult to move the clamping device down to clamp on theobject. Thus, an auto lock mechanism can be included to disable thelinkage mechanism for empty clamping device for easy of picking objects.

The object can be disposed between the open jaws of the clamping device.The auto lock mechanism can re-enable the linkage mechanism. Theclamping device can clamp on the object, and deliver the object to adesired location. Afterward, the pulling element of the clamping devicecan move further down so that the jaws can release the object. When theclamping device lifts up to move to other locations, the lifting upaction can cause the jaws to clamp again on the object, which canpresent difficulty to move the clamping device and leaving the object atthe destination. The auto lock mechanism can disable the linkagemechanism for empty clamping device with open jaws for easy of leavingobjects at destinations.

FIG. 27E shows a clamping device having a pulling element having aslanting interface including a planar slanting surface interacting witha roller. The clamping device can have a fixed jaw and an opposite jawmovable due to a moving action of the pulling element using the slantinginterface between the planar surface of the jaw and a roller on thepulling element. For example, the pulling element can couple to aroller, which can roll on the slanting surface of the jaw, and optionalon a slanting surface of a jaw support which can be fixedly coupled tothe clamping device. When the pulling element moves up, the roller canroll up on the jaw, causing the jaw to move toward the other jaw.

As shown, the clamping device 2704 can have two portions 2714 (thepulling element) and 2734 (one jaw of the two jaws of the clampingdevice), coupled together through a slanting surface 2754. The pullingelement 2714 can move up due to a pulling force, or down due to gravity.When moving up or down, the slanting surface 2754 can cause the jaw 2734to move left or right, respectively, as shown in the figure. Themovements of the jaw 2734 can clamp on an object, e.g., the jaw movingtoward the opposite jaw, or to release the object, e.g., the jaw movingaway from the opposite jaw.

For example, when the pulling element moves up 2724, the larger portionof the jaw due to the slanting surface can cause the jaw to move 2744 tothe left, toward the other jaw for clamping on the object. When thepulling element moves down, the smaller portion of the jaw due to theslanting surface can cause the jaw to move to the left, away from theother jaw for releasing the object.

The clamping device 2704 is shown without an object, and with thelinkage mechanism between the pulling element and the jaw activated. Theclamping device is lifted up 2724. The lifting action causes the jaw tomove 2744 toward the opposite jaw. When the clamping device ispositioned near an object for pick up, the closeness of the jaws canmake it difficult to move the clamping device down to clamp on theobject. Thus, an auto lock mechanism can be included to disable thelinkage mechanism for empty clamping device for easy of picking objects.

The object can be disposed between the open jaws of the clamping device.The auto lock mechanism can re-enable the linkage mechanism. Theclamping device can clamp on the object, and deliver the object to adesired location. Afterward, the pulling element of the clamping devicecan move further down so that the jaws can release the object. When theclamping device lifts up to move to other locations, the lifting upaction can cause the jaws to clamp again on the object, which canpresent difficulty to move the clamping device and leaving the object atthe destination. The auto lock mechanism can disable the linkagemechanism for empty clamping device with open jaws for easy of leavingobjects at destinations.

FIG. 27F shows a clamping device having a pulling element havingslanting interfaces including curved or spiral surfaces interacting withrollers. The clamping device can have a fixed jaw and an opposite jawmovable due to a rotational action of a rotatable element. The pullingelement, which can be a flexible cable or chain, can be coupled to therotatable element, to rotate the rotatable element in one direction whenthe pulling element is pulled up.

The rotatable element can have a slanting interface, which includesspiral surfaces on the rotatable element interacting with rollers on ajaw support coupled to the clamping device. When the pulling elementmoves up, the rotatable element can rotate, with the rollers roll on thespiral surfaces of the rotatable element, causing the jaw to move towardthe other jaw.

As shown, the clamping device 2705 can have two portions 2715 (thepulling element, the rotatable element, and the jaw) and 2735 (therollers coupled to the jaw support of the clamping device), coupledtogether through spiral surfaces 2755 on the rotatable element. Thepulling element 2715 can move up due to a pulling force, or down due toa spring mechanism in the rotatable element. When moving up or down, thespiral surfaces 2755 can cause the jaw 2735 to move left or right,respectively, as shown in the figure. The movements of the jaw 2735 canclamp on an object, e.g., the jaw moving toward the opposite jaw, or torelease the object, e.g., the jaw moving away from the opposite jaw.

For example, when the pulling element moves up 2725, the rotatableelement can rotate, presenting a thicker portion of the spiral surfaceto the rollers, and thus can cause the jaw to move 2745 to the left,toward the other jaw for clamping on the object. When the pullingelement moves down, for example, when the force holding the pullingelement is released, the spring mechanism in the rotatable element cancause the rotatable element to rotate in an opposite direction. Thethinner portion of the spiral surface can be facing the rollers, andthus can cause the jaw to move to the left, away from the other jaw forreleasing the object.

The clamping device 2705 is shown without an object, and with thelinkage mechanism between the pulling element and the jaw activated. Theclamping device is lifted up 2725. The lifting action causes the jaw tomove 2745 toward the opposite jaw. When the clamping device ispositioned near an object for pick up, the closeness of the jaws canmake it difficult to move the clamping device down to clamp on theobject. Thus, an auto lock mechanism can be included to disable thelinkage mechanism for empty clamping device for easy of picking objects.

The object can be disposed between the open jaws of the clamping device.The auto lock mechanism can re-enable the linkage mechanism. Theclamping device can clamp on the object, and deliver the object to adesired location. Afterward, the pulling element of the clamping devicecan move further down so that the jaws can release the object. When theclamping device lifts up to move to other locations, the lifting upaction can cause the jaws to clamp again on the object, which canpresent difficulty to move the clamping device and leaving the object atthe destination. The auto lock mechanism can disable the linkagemechanism for empty clamping device with open jaws for easy of leavingobjects at destinations.

In some embodiments, the present invention discloses clamping deviceshaving an automatic trigger mechanism, such as an automatic lockingmechanism to prevent the jaws from moving toward each other when theclamping device is lifted up. The locking mechanism can allow the jawsto remain open when desired, even during the lifting and moving of theclamping device. Normally, the clamping device is configured so thatwhen one end of the clamping arm is pulled up, the jaws of the clampingdevice will clamp on the object. Thus when the empty clamping device islifted up, the jaws are clamped together. This can be detrimental, sincethe clamped jaws will need to be open to accept the object. The lockingmechanism can force the jaws open when there is no clamped object. Thusthe empty clamping device with the open jaws can be lifted up and movedto the location of the object, at which the open jaws can accept theobject. The mechanism is then released, and the jaws can be clampedtogether when lifted up to hold the object for moving.

The locking mechanism can be activated when the jaws are separated. Forexample, after bringing an object to a destination, a pulling element ofthe clamping device can be lowered while the clamping device isstationary, e.g., the pulling element moves down relative to theclamping device. The lowering of the pulling element can move the jawsopened, e.g., separating the jaws apart. Thus the locking mechanism canbe activated when the jaws are separated at a predetermined distance,such as a maximum separation distance or a distance close to the maximumdistance. For example, the jaws can be separated to a maximum distanceto partially activate the locking mechanism. When the pulling elementreverses direction, e.g., starts pulling up, the jaws can move closertogether. The closing movement of the jaws can complete the lockingmechanism, preventing the jaws from moving further toward each other,and essentially keeping the jaws opened at a distance less than themaximum distance.

The locking mechanism can be partially deactivated by lowering thepulling element relative to the clamping device. The lowering of thepulling element can separate the jaws a little. Then the pulling elementcan be pulled up, complete the deactivation process. The jaws can movetoward each other, for clamping on the object.

In some embodiments, the auto lock mechanism can be partially activatedby lowering the pulling element so that the jaws can pass a certainseparation distance. The pulling element is lowered relative to otherelements of the clamping device, thus in some embodiments, the clampingdevice is rested against something, such as on the object that the clampdevice is carried and the object is placed on the ground. Thus, the autolock mechanism can be partially activated by lowering a hoist coupled tothe clamping device carrying the object so that the object contacts theground. The hoist can then be further lowered so that the jaws can beseparated passing a certain separation distance, for example, by movinga pulling element down relative to the rest of the clamping device.

The auto lock mechanism can then be completely activated by pulling upthe pulling element, which can secure the jaws open, at the previouslyseparation distance or at a separation distance smaller or slightlysmaller than the previously separation distance, for example, due to thepossibility that the jaws can move together a little after the pullingelement is pulled up.

In some embodiments, the auto lock mechanism can be partiallydeactivated by lowering the pulling element. The pulling element can bepreviously not pullable up, due to the activation of the auto lockmechanism. Thus, the pulling element can partially be released from theactivation of the auto lock mechanism by reversing the movement, e.g.,by lowering the pulling element. The lowering of the pulling element cankeep the jaws at the previous separation distance, or can enlarge theseparation distance, such as increasing the separation distance by asmall amount, for example, due to the possibility that the jaws can moveaway from each other a little after the pulling element is lowered.

The pulling element is lowered relative to other elements of theclamping device, thus in some embodiments, the clamping device is restedagainst something, such as on the object that the clamp device is readyto pick up and the object is placed on the ground. Thus, the auto lockmechanism can be partially deactivated by lowering a hoist coupled tothe empty clamping device so that the clamping device contacts theobject. The hoist can then be further lowered so that the pullingelement can move down relative to the rest of the clamping device.

The auto lock mechanism can then be completely deactivated by pulling upthe pulling element, which can allow the jaws to move toward each other.

The locking mechanism can secure the top arm portion, e.g., to preventthe top arm portion from moving up/down or sideways. For example, thetop arm portion can be locked to the pivotal point between the top armportion and the bottom arm portion, or to any element fixedly coupled tothe pivotal point. The top arm portion can be locked to an intermediatepivot within the top arm portion.

In some embodiments, the locking mechanism, e.g., the mechanism that canlock the jaws into the open state until being released, can include amechanism that couples a hoist portion of the clamping device, e.g., theportion of the clamping device that is coupled to a hoist for pullingthe clamping device, with a fixed component such as the fixed jaws or apivot bar connecting the pivot points of the scissor mechanisms. Thus,the mechanism can be configured so that if being locked, the hoistportion can move together with the pivot points, so that the scissormechanisms cannot function. In this configuration, the hoist portion isthen decoupled from the scissor mechanisms, and thus when lifted up, thejaws remain open. If the mechanism is released, the hoist portion can beseparated from the pivot points, so that the scissor mechanisms canfunction, e.g., clamping on the object. In this configuration, the hoistportion is then coupled to the scissor mechanisms, and thus when liftedup, the jaws can clamp on the object.

The locking mechanism can be automatic, meaning the mechanism can belocked or engaged, e.g., locking the jaws to keep the jaws separated, orunlocked or disengaged, e.g., unlocking the jaws to allow the jaws tomove toward each other. The automatic mechanism can be triggered ortoggled (e.g., activated when being deactivated and deactivated whenbeing activated) by moving a hoist coupled to the pulling element of theclamping device.

For example, the locking mechanism can be engaged, meaning the jaws canbe widely separated and prevented from moving toward each other when anempty clamping device is lifted up. The clamping device can be loweredtoward the object. After touching the object, the pulling element canfurther move down while the rest of the clamping device is stationary.The moving down of the pulling element can partially unlock the lockingmechanism, meaning the jaws can move toward each other when the clampingdevice is lifted up. The locking mechanism can be fully unlocked whenthe clamping device is lifted up, which moves the jaws together to clampon the object. The clamping device can move to a new location. Theclamping device can lower the object. When the object reaches theground, the pulling element can be lowered further, e.g., while the restof the clamping device is stationary, to trigger or activate the lockingmechanism to change the state of the locking mechanism. The lockingmechanism then can be engaged, meaning the jaws can be widely separatedand prevented from moving toward each other when the clamping device islifted up. The clamping device can then move up to move another object.Since the locking mechanism is engaged, the clamping device can lift upwithout moving the jaws.

The locking mechanism can be a hand-free or operator-free mechanism,which can allow switching between a clamping action of the jaws forclamping the object and non-clamping action of the jaws for insertingthe object. The hand-free mechanism can allow a single operator tooperate the clamping device for lifting and moving the object. Forexample, the locking mechanism can be activated or released by a pushingaction, for example, when the clamping device is lowered down or pulledup.

FIGS. 28A-28D illustrate configurations of clamping devices having alocking mechanism according to some embodiments. FIGS. 28A(a)-28A(b)shows a schematic for a clamping device 2800, including two jaws 2860and 2830 for clamping on an object. A pulling element 2810 can becoupled with jaw 2830 through a linkage mechanism 2850. The linkagemechanism can be configured so that when the pulling element is moved,relative to the jaw, the jaw is moved in a different direction. Forexample, when the pulling element moves up 2820, the jaw can move 2840toward the opposite jaw.

A locking mechanism 2880 or 2880* can be included to allow a togglingbetween enabling (FIG. 28A(a)) and disabling (FIG. 28A(b)) of thelinkage mechanism between the pulling element and the jaw. For example,a locking mechanism 2880 can form a coupling between the pulling element2810 and the clamp bar 2870 of the clamping device. When the lockingmechanism is unlocked, as shown in FIG. 28A(a), the linkage mechanism isenable, meaning the pulling element can move up and down, which can movethe jaw sideway through the linkage mechanism. When the lockingmechanism is locked, as shown in FIG. 28A(b), the pulling element isfixedly coupled to the clamp bar. Thus the pulling element cannot moveup and down relative to the rest of the clamping device. The linkagemechanism is then disable, since the pulling element cannot move, andthus cannot move the jaw sideway.

Alternatively, another locking mechanism 2880* can form a couplingbetween the pulling element 2810 and a component of the linkagemechanism 2850, such as a rotatable element. When the locking mechanismis unlocked, as shown in FIG. 28A(a), the linkage mechanism is enable,meaning the pulling element can move up and down relative to the linkagemechanism, which can move the jaw sideway through the linkage mechanism.When the locking mechanism is locked, as shown in FIG. 28A(b), thepulling element is fixedly coupled to the linkage mechanism. Thus thepulling element cannot move up and down relative to the linkagemechanism, e.g., to the other components of the clamping device. Thelinkage mechanism is then disable, since the pulling element cannotmove, and thus cannot move the jaw sideway.

Other configurations for the locking mechanism can be used, which cansecure any two components between the pulling element, the jaw, and thelinkage between the pulling element and the jaw. For example, a lockingmechanism can be between the pulling element and the jaw, or between thejaw and a component of the linkage mechanism.

FIG. 28B shows a schematic of a locking mechanism 2855 toggling betweena locked (or engaged) state 2855A and an unlocked (or disengaged) state2855B.

The locking mechanism 2855 can include 2 portions 2856 and 2857, whichcan be secured together (in locked or engaged stated 2855A), or can beseparatable from each other (in unlocked or disengaged state 2855B). Thelocking mechanism can be a toggle mechanism, which can change statesusing a same set of activation mechanism. For example, the activationmechanism for the toggling operation 2865 can include a set of up anddown forces 2866 acting on one or both portions 2856 and 2857 of thelocking mechanism.

The toggling operation can include a conversion of a vertical force to arotational force, for example, through a slanting surface such as ahelical surface. The vertical force can be accomplished by the clampingdevice moving up or down. The rotational force can be used to activate arotational latch, which can be toggled between a latch position and anunlatch position.

FIGS. 28C(a)-(c) show a process for automatically activating the lockingmechanism. A locking mechanism is configured to couple a pulling element2910 and a clamp bar 2870. The locking mechanism can include a lockreceptacle 2881 which is coupled to the pulling element. The lockingmechanism can include a lock housing 2882 which is coupled to the clampbar. The lock housing can include a lock element 2883, such as a pin ora hook, which can retract or extend out of the lock housing for engagingwith the lock receptacle.

In FIG. 28C(a), the locking mechanism is in an unlocked status 2880A,with lock element 2883 retracted into the lock housing 2882. The lockreceptacle and the lock housing are separated, so the pulling elementcan move relative to the clamp bar.

In FIG. 28C(b), the pulling element moves toward the clamp bar. Themovement is relative, meaning the two components move toward each other,such as one component moving and the other component stationary, or bothcomponents moving. The lock receptacle can contact the lock housing. Thelock element can be coupled to the lock receptacle.

In FIG. 28C(c), the pulling element relatively moves away from the clampbar. The lock element can still be coupled to the lock receptacle, andalso to the lock housing. The lock mechanism is activated, e.g., thelocking mechanism is in a locked status 2880B, securing the pullingelement with the clamp bar. The pulling element thus will move as a unitwith the clamp bar, e.g., with the clamping device. The linkagemechanism is now disable, meaning the pulling element cannot influencethe movements of the jaw.

In FIG. 28D(a), the locking mechanism is in a locked status 2880B, withlock element 2883 extended and hooked into the lock housing 2882. Thelock receptacle and the lock housing are coupled together, so thepulling element cannot move relative to the clamp bar.

In FIG. 28D(b), the pulling element relatively moves toward the clampbar. The lock receptacle can contact the lock housing. The lock elementcan be move further into the lock housing.

In FIG. 28D(c), the pulling element relatively moves away from the clampbar. The lock element can move further into the lock housing, andreleasing the coupling with the lock receptacle. The lock mechanism isdeactivated, e.g., the locking mechanism is in an unlocked status 2880A,separating the pulling element with the clamp bar. The pulling elementthus can move relative to the clamp bar, e.g., to the clamping device.The linkage mechanism is now enable, meaning the pulling element caninfluence the movements of the jaw.

FIGS. 29A-29C illustrate a configuration of the locking mechanismaccording to some embodiments. FIG. 29A shows a schematic of a forceconversion, using a slanting surface, such as a portion of a helicalsurface. The slanting surface can convert a vertical force to a forceparallel to the surface of the slanting surface. Further, by using ahelical surface, the parallel force can be a tangential force, e.g., arotational force around the axis of the helix. Thus, by using a curveslanting surface, such as a helical surface, a vertical force 2962 canbe converted to a rotational force 2963 around the axis of the helix.

An annular element 2971 can have multiple teeth 2972 arranging aroundthe annular element 2971. Each tooth can have a curve slanting surface2973, such as a portion of a helical surface. Each tooth can have avalley point 2974, e.g., the connection between an end of the toothslanting surface and the beginning of a rise of a next tooth.

A rod 2953 can be disposed within the annular element 2971. A pin 2954can be coupled to the rod 2953, such as protruding from a surface of therod. The pin can penetrate the rod at a center of the rod, thus can beprotruded from both sides of the rod. The rod thus can be constrained tomove in the vertical direction, e.g., along the axis of the rod,subjected to the constraint of the pin. For example, the pin can contactthe slanting surface, and thus prevent the rod from continuing moving ina straight vertical direction. The rod can also rotate in the annularelement, subjected to the constraint of the pin. For example, the pincan contact the valley point, and thus prevent the rod from continuingrotating.

Thus, under a vertical force 2962, the rod can move in a verticaldirection, until the pin 2954 contacts the slanting surface 2973. Thepin then moves along the slanting surface to stop at the valley point2974. The moving of the pin 2954 along the slanting surface 2973 canrotate 2963 the rod 2953. The angle of rotation is from the location ofthe vertical force to the valley point.

FIG. 29B shows a first portion, such as portion 2951, of a lockingmechanism 2950. The first portion can function to convert verticalforces 2961, such as forces caused by the clamping device lifted up andmoved down during the picking and releasing of objects, to a rotationalforce 2964.

The first portion can include two annular elements 2971 and 2976arranged concentrically. Each annular element can have a number of teetharranged around the circumference of the annular element. The teeth canbe arranged in a cyclic fashion, for example, there can be 4 teeth inone annular element. Each tooth can have a curve slanting surface movingalong a circumference of the annular element, such as a portion of ahelical surface. Each tooth can have a valley point at an end of thetooth, e.g., at the end of the curve slanting surface. Each tooth canhave a sharp rise, for example, from the valley point of an adjacenttooth.

For example, the annular element 2971 can have multiple teeth, such as 4teeth 2972, arranged cyclically around a circumference of the annularelement 2971. Each tooth 2972 can have a curve slanting surface 2973,which ends at a valley point 2974. At the valley point 2974, an adjacenttooth can be positioned, having a sharp rise, and followed by a newslanting surface.

Similarly, the annular element 2976 can have multiple teeth, such as 4teeth 2977, arranged cyclically around a circumference of the annularelement 2976. Each tooth 2977 can have a curve slanting surface 2978,which ends at a valley point 2979. At the valley point 2979, an adjacenttooth can be positioned, having a sharp rise, and followed by a newslanting surface.

A rod 2953 can be disposed in the annular elements 2971 and 2976. Therod outer circumference can be about the same as the inner circumferenceof the annular elements, so that the rod can fit snuggly within theannular elements. Thus the rod can move along the axis of the rod (whichis the same as the axis of the annular elements), as well as can rotatearound the rod axis.

A pin 2954 can pass through a center of the rod, perpendicular to therod axis. The pin can be protruded from the rod outer circumference. Thepin can be positioned as to be between the annular elements. The pin canconstrain the rod movements within the annular elements. For example,the rod can move vertically, but within the confinement of the twoannular elements, e.g., the rod can move relative to the annularelements, but the rod cannot be separated from the annular elements,e.g., the rod cannot be removed from the annular elements. The rod canalso rotate, but within the confinement of the teeth, e.g., the rod canrotate, and when the pin hits a tooth, the rod can move vertically toavoid the tooth, before continuing rotating.

The annular elements can be arranged so that a combination of a set ofvertical movements or forces, e.g., an up movement followed by a downmovement or a down movement followed by an up movement, can rotate therod to toggle the locking mechanism between a locked state and anunlocked state. The annular elements can be fixedly positioned withrespect to each other, e.g., the two annular elements can move as aunit.

For example, the annular elements can be arranged so that the teeth onthe annular elements are facing each other, e.g., the teeth on oneannular element face the teeth on another annular element. Further, theteeth are arranged in opposite directions, for example, the slantingsurfaces of the teeth in one annular element form an angle differentfrom zero angle (e.g., not parallel) with the slanting surfaces of theteeth in another annular element. The angle can be between 70 and 110degrees, or between 75 and 105 degrees, or between 80 and 100 degrees,or between 85 and 95 degrees. In addition, the valley points of theteeth in one annular element are configured to face the slantingsurfaces of the teeth in the opposite annular element.

In operation, the rod can move up, relative to the annular elements. Forexample, the annular elements can be fixedly coupled to a component ofthe clamping device. The component can move down while the rod isstationary. The pin 2954, originally positioned at a valley point 2979of a tooth 2977 of the bottom annular element 2976, can move up tocontact the slanting surface 2973 of a tooth 2972 of the top annularelement 2971. Further vertical movement of the rod can make the pinmoving along the slanting surface 2973, and resting at the valley point2974. The movement of the pin along the slanting surface can rotate therod, for example, at an angle corresponded to the traveled distance ofthe pin along the slanting surface.

The rod can then move down, relative to the annular elements. Forexample, the component in which the annular elements is fixedly coupledto, can move up while the rod is stationary. The pin 2954, originallypositioned at a valley point 2974 of a tooth 2972 of the top annularelement 2971, can move up down contact the slanting surface of a toothof the bottom annular element. Further vertical movement of the rod canmake the pin moving along the slanting surface, and resting at thevalley point. The movement of the pin along the slanting surface canrotate the rod, for example, at an angle corresponded to the traveleddistance of the pin along the slanting surface.

A combination of the rod moving up and then down can rotate the rod anangle corresponded to the movement of the pin from one valley point toan adjacent valley point, for example, of the bottom annular element.Thus, if there are 4 teeth at an annular element, the spacing of twovalley points can correspond to an angle of 90 degrees, e.g., the rodrotates a 90 degree angle when the rod moves up and down, e.g., theclamping device component in which the annular elements is fixedlycoupled to, moves down and up.

Further movements of the rod (or the component of the clamping device)can rotate the rod another 90 degrees, e.g., vertical movements 2961 ofthe rod or the clamping device component can be converted to arotational movement 2964 of the rod.

FIG. 29C shows a second portion, such as portion 2952, of a lockingmechanism 2950. The second portion can function to convert a rotation,e.g., the rotation of a rod disposed within two annular elements havingteeth with curve slanting surfaces, to a toggling mechanism between alocked state and an unlocked state.

The second portion 2952 can include a receptacle 2981, which isconfigured to be securable to the rotatable rod 2953. For example, atthe end, or near the end, of the rod 2953, there can be an asymmetrichook 2955, including an elongated portion 2955A and a shortened portion2955B, such as an oval or a rectangular shape. The receptacle 2981 canhave a parallel hook feature that is configured to hook or secure on theelongated portion of the rod 2953.

Thus, when the rod rotates, the rod can be locked with the receptacle,e.g., in a locked state between the rod and the receptacle, or the rodcan be separable from the receptacle, e.g., in an unlocked state betweenthe rod and the receptacle. The locking and unlocking states can betoggled by continuing rotating the rod. For example, the rod can bepositioned so that the elongated portion engaged 2950A with the parallelhook feature of the receptacle, locking the rod 2953 with the receptacle2981. In the locked state, the rod can move a small distance elative tothe receptacle, but the rod cannot be separated or removed from thereceptacle.

When the rod rotates 90 degrees, the elongated portion is now parallelwith the parallel hook feature of the receptacle, and the shortenedportion does not engage with the receptacle. This releases the rod fromthe receptacle, forming the unlocked state in which the rod can beseparated or removed from the receptacle. Rotating the rod 90 degreesagain, in either rotation direction, can re-engage the locking mechanismby mating the elongated portion with the parallel hook feature of thereceptacle. Thus the locked and unlocked states can be toggled byrotating the rod, such as rotating 90 degrees.

A locking mechanism including the annular elements having cyclic teethconfiguration, the rod having the asymmetric hook, and the receptaclehaving parallel hook feature can be toggled between locked and unlockedstates, through set of up and down movements.

FIGS. 30A-30F illustrate configurations for clamping devices accordingto some embodiments. In FIGS. 30A(a) and 30A(b), a clamping device 3001can have a scissor mechanism as the linkage mechanism. A lockingmechanism can be included, linking a pulling element to a pivotal pointof the scissor mechanism. In FIG. 30A(a), when the locking mechanism isengaged 3081A, e.g., locking the pulling element to the pivotal point,the jaws can be fixed at a open configuration, which can allow theclamping device to move for approaching and placing an object betweenthe opening of the jaw. In FIG. 30A(b), when the locking mechanism isdisengaged 3081B, e.g., unlocking the pulling element from the pivotalpoint, the jaws can move toward each other when the pulling element ispulled up, which can allow the clamping device to clamp on an object formoving to a destination.

In FIGS. 30B(a) and 30B(b), a clamping device 3002 can have a halfscissor mechanism as the linkage mechanism. A locking mechanism can beincluded, linking a pulling element to a clamp bar of the clampingdevice. In FIG. 30B(a), when the locking mechanism is engaged 3082A,e.g., locking the pulling element to the clamp bar, the jaws can befixed at a open configuration, which can allow the clamping device tomove for approaching and placing an object between the opening of thejaw. In FIG. 30B(b), when the locking mechanism is disengaged 3082B,e.g., unlocking the pulling element from the clamp bar, the jaws canmove toward each other when the pulling element is pulled up, which canallow the clamping device to clamp on an object for moving to adestination.

In FIGS. 30C(a) and 30C(b), a clamping device 3003 can have a slantinginterface mechanism as the linkage mechanism. A locking mechanism can beincluded, linking a pulling element to a pivotal point of the scissormechanism. In FIG. 30C(a), when the locking mechanism is engaged 3083A,e.g., locking the pulling element to the pivotal point, the jaws can befixed at a open configuration, which can allow the clamping device tomove for approaching and placing an object between the opening of thejaw. In FIG. 30C(b), when the locking mechanism is disengaged 3083B,e.g., unlocking the pulling element from the pivotal point, the jaws canmove toward each other when the pulling element is pulled up, which canallow the clamping device to clamp on an object for moving to adestination.

In FIGS. 30D(a) and 30D(b), a clamping device 3005 can have a slantinginterface mechanism as the linkage mechanism. A locking mechanism can beincluded, linking a pulling element to a clamp bar of the clampingdevice. In FIG. 30D(a), when the locking mechanism is engaged 3085A,e.g., locking the pulling element to the clamp bar, the jaws can befixed at a open configuration, which can allow the clamping device tomove for approaching and placing an object between the opening of thejaw. In FIG. 30D(b), when the locking mechanism is disengaged 3085B,e.g., unlocking the pulling element from the clamp bar, the jaws canmove toward each other when the pulling element is pulled up, which canallow the clamping device to clamp on an object for moving to adestination.

In FIGS. 30E(a) and 30E(b), a clamping device 3006 can have a spiralslanting interface mechanism as the linkage mechanism. A lockingmechanism can be included, linking a rotatable element to a jaw supportof the clamping device. In FIG. 30E(a), when the locking mechanism isengaged 3086A, e.g., locking the rotatable element to the jaw support,the jaws can be fixed at a open configuration, which can allow theclamping device to move for approaching and placing an object betweenthe opening of the jaw. In FIG. 30E(b), when the locking mechanism isdisengaged 3086B, e.g., unlocking the rotatable element from the jawsupport, the jaws can move toward each other when the pulling element ispulled up, which can allow the clamping device to clamp on an object formoving to a destination.

In some embodiments, a locking mechanism can include at least a slantinginterface, e.g., a coupling between a planar or curved slanting surfacewith another slanting surface or with a roller for reducing friction. Aslanting interface can change a direction of a force, for example, canmove sideway a component having the slanting surface by using a straightforce. The sideway movement can be used for extending or retracting thecomponent, or can be used for rotating the component.

The locking mechanism can have a cylindrical shape, with curved slantingsurfaces, such as portions of a spiral surface. The pressing (andreleasing) force can be converted to a rotational action, together withoptional extension or retraction. For example, with the recessesconfiguration, the mover can rotate and retract. The cylindrical shapecan avoid the sideward shifting of the locking mechanism, since themover and the pin coupled to the mover can rotate around a fixedrotational axis.

In some embodiments, the slanting interfaces can be configured toprovide a locking mechanism with rotational movements of a lockingelement, such as the pin coupled to the mover, without the linearmovements such as the extension of retraction of the locking element.

In some embodiments, the slanting interfaces can include a slantingsurface, such as a planar slanting surface or a spiral slanting surface,mating with a cylindrical element, such as solid rod or a rotatable rod,e.g., a roller. The interface between a slanting surface and acylindrical element can reduce friction, e.g., the cylindrical can runeasier on the slanting surface than a slanting surface runs on theslanting surface, due to the minimum contact area.

In some embodiments, the present invention discloses an automaticlocking assembly having an automatic locking mechanism that can beincorporated in a clamping device. The automatic locking assembly canuse up and down movements of the clamping device to toggle a lock, e.g.,switching between locked and unlocked states, of two movable componentsof the clamping device. In the locked state, the two movable componentsof the clamping device are coupled together, e.g., not removable orseparatable from each other, thus keeping the jaws in a stationaryconfiguration when the clamping device moves. In the unlocked state, thetwo movable components of the clamping device are separable, e.g., onecomponent can move relative to the other component, thus imposing aforce on the jaws for clamping on an object when the clamping device islifted up.

In some embodiments, the automatic locking assembly can include aslanting surface, such as a curve slanting surface or a helical slantingsurface, mating with a cylindrical element, such as a rotatable pin,e.g., a roller. The slanting surface can change a force direction, suchas changing an up/down movement to a rotational movement. The interfacebetween a slanting surface and a cylindrical element can reducefriction, e.g., the cylindrical can run easier on the slanting surfacethan a flat surface runs on the slanting surface, due to the minimumcontact area. Further, a bearing can be incorporated, to further reducefriction between the cylindrical element and the slanting surface.

The automatic locking assembly can be coupled to a clamping device forautomatic disabling or enabling a linkage mechanism of the clampingdevice. The linkage mechanism is configured to transfer a pulling forceon the clamping device to a clamping force from the jaws of the clampingdevice. The linkage mechanism can include linkage arms, joints and/orelements connecting together, and movable with respect to the body ofthe clamping device.

In some embodiments, the automatic locking assembly can include twolockable elements that can be secured together, e.g., locked together,and can be removed from each other, e.g., separated from each other. Thetwo lockable elements can include a hook and an eye, in which the hookcan be coupled to the eye for securing the hook with the eye. The twolockable elements can include a rod and a receptacle, in which the rodcan enter the receptacle to prevent the rod or the receptacle frommoving sideway. The two lockable elements can include a rod having ahookable element such as an elongated end and a parallel hookreceptacle, e.g., two hooks running parallel to each other. The hookableelement can be inserted into the parallel hook receptacle, such as theelongated end positioned parallel to the parallel hook receptacle. Inthis configuration, the hookable element can enter and leave thereceptacle, e.g., the two lockable elements are free to move relative toeach other.

After the hookable element is inserted into the parallel hookreceptacle, the hookable element can be rotated so that the elongatedend can position perpendicular to the parallel hook receptacle. In thisconfiguration, the hookable element is secured with the receptacle,since the hook ends of the parallel hook of the receptacle can preventthe elongated end from leaving the receptacle.

In some embodiments, the automatic locking assembly can include twoslanting surfaces together with one or more curve shape elements forinteracting with the slanting surfaces. The curve shape elements caninclude a curved surface such as a cylindrical or elliptical rod, or apartial cylindrical or elliptical rod. The curved surface can reducefriction with the slanting surfaces, for example, due to reduced surfacecontact area. The curve shape element can include a roller such as aball bearing or a rod bearing. The roller can further reduce frictionwith the slanting surface, for example, due to the rollable action ofthe roller.

The slanting surfaces can change a direction of a movement of the curveshape element, such as rotating the curve shape element when the curveshape element moves toward and interacting with the slanting surfaces.The rotation of the curve shape element can coupled to a lockableconfiguration of the automatic locking assembly, such as the rotation ofa rod having an elongated end in a parallel hook receptacle.

The automatic locking assembly can be configured so that two slantingsurfaces can face each other, and also face the curve shape element,such as protruded pins from a rod. The first slanting surface can beconfigured to accept the protruded pins in a first moving direction ofthe pins, and then move the protruded pins along the slanting surface.The slanting surface can be a curve slanting surface, such as a helicalsurface. The movements of the protruded pins along the slanting surfacecan rotate the rod, e.g., when the pins run along the helical surface.

The second slanting surface can be configured to accept the protrudedpins, e.g., the same protruded pins or new additional protruded pinsfrom the rod. The second slanting surface can move the protruded pinsalong the slanting surface, for example, a helical surface, such asrotating the rod by the protruded pins running along the helicalsurface.

FIGS. 31A-31D illustrate a schematic configuration for a lockingmechanism or assembly according to some embodiments. The lockingmechanism can employ a slanting interface for repeatedly rotating a rodthrough a repeatedly set of vertical forces. If the rod has a rotationalsymmetry, e.g., the rod geometry remains the same after rotating acertain angle, a set of vertical forces on the rod can rotate the rodhalf the rotational symmetry angle. Two successive sets of verticalforces will return the rod to its original configuration, e.g., rotatingthe rod the rotational symmetry angle.

In some embodiments, the locking mechanism can include two lockableelements, such as a rod with a hook end, e.g., a hookable element at ornear an end of the rod, and a hook receptacle, e.g., a receptacle havinga hookable feature that can be mated to the hookable element of the rod.Depending on the orientation of the hook end, the rod can be secured inthe hook receptacle to move as a same unit with the receptacle, or therod can move independent of the receptacle, e.g., the rod can beseparated or removed from the receptacle, and thus operating as twoseparate units.

For example, the hookable element can have an elongated shape, such as arectangle or an ellipse. The rod thus can have a perpendicular elongatedend, for example, the rod with the hookable element can look line ahammer. The perpendicular elongated end can have the shape of a head ofa square sledge hammer, coupled to a rod as a handle of the hammer. Thelonger side of the elongated shape can be secured to a hookable featureof the hook receptacle, while the shorter end can be released or movablefrom the hook receptacle. A rotation of the rod can toggle between thesecured state, e.g., the longer side hooked to the hook receptacle, andthe loose state, e.g., the shorter side faced the hookable feature ofthe hook receptacle.

FIG. 31A shows a schematic detail of a first portion 3151 of a lockingassembly using slanting interfaces. The locking assembly can include twoportions 3151 and 3152, forming two lockable elements. A first portion,or the first lockable element can include a slanting surface interactingelement 3153, such as a rod, together with slanting surface elements3171 and 3176, each having at least a slanting surface, such as twoannular elements having cyclic teeth. A second portion, or a secondlockable element can include a hook receptacle 3181, which can include ahookable feature 3181A, such as parallel hook ends (shown in FIG. 31C).

The first portion, or the first lockable element of a locking assemblycan include a slanting surface interacting element, such as a rod 3153.One end of the rod can include a hook end or a hookable element 3155,which can include a perpendicular elongated portion having a longer side3155A and a shorter side 3155B. The longer side can be latched in thehook receptacle, with the longer side mated with the hook ends 3181A ofthe hook receptacle 3181. When the longer side 3155A of the rod end 3155is mated with the hooks 3181A of the hook receptacle 3181, the hookreceptacle 3181 can be hooked to the rod and cannot be released from therod, e.g., the locking mechanism is enable.

The shorter side can allow the rod to be free to move in out of the hookreceptacle. The longer side 3155A can be parallel with the parallel hookends 3181A, and the shorter side 3155B can be clear from the parallelhook ends. Thus the rod 3153 can be separated or removed from the hookreceptacle 3181, since the separation between the parallel hook ends3181A is bigger than the shorter side 3155B of the rod 3153.

By rotating the rod, such as a 90 degree angle for this elongated hookelement 3155, the status of the lock can be toggle between locked andunlocked, e.g., the rod is hooked to the hook receptacle, and the rod isfree to move in and out of the hook receptacle. When the shorter side ofthe rod 3153 is clear of the parallel hook ends of the hook receptacle,the hooks do not capture the rod, and thus the rod 3153 and the hookreceptacle 3181 can be separated, e.g., the locking mechanism isdisable.

The rod 3153 can include a protruded element 3154, such as a pin, whichcan be a pin passing through the rod and protruded from both sides ofthe rod, together with optional ball bearings or rollers coupling to theends of the pin or to the portion of the pin in the rod. The optionalbearings can allow the pin to rotate easily with respect to the rod. Theprotruded pin can include cylindrical pins, rollers, elliptical pins, orany shape protrusions that can slide along the slanting surfaces of thefirst and second annular elements. Multiple pins can also be used. Theprotruded element can interface with the slanting surfaces of theelements 3171 and 3176 having slanting surfaces.

The elements 3171 and 3176 having slanting surfaces can includering-like elements, such as annular elements, which can have slantingsurfaces in the form of helical or spiral surfaces. The annular elementscan have a hollow cylindrical shape, such as a ring or a hollowcylinder, with an axis of rotation 3151A. For example, the annularelements can have cyclic teeth, e.g., teeth configured around thecircumference of the annular elements. The number of teeth can bedividable by 2 or by 4, such as 4 teeth or 8 teeth. The teeth can havehelical surfaces rising from a base of the annular elements, followed byabrupt surfaces going back down to the base, after reaching peaks of theteeth. The other end of the helical surfaces can reach valley points,before followed by the abrupt surfaces of the adjacent teeth.

Annular element 3171 can have multiple teeth 3172, such as 4 teetharranged cyclically around a circumference of the base of the annularelement 3171. Each tooth can have a helical surface 3173. At the end ofthe helical surface 3173 near the base, there can be a valley point3174, which can be followed by an adjacent tooth, e.g., an abruptsurface of the adjacent tooth.

Similarly, annular element 3176 can have 4 teeth 3177, arrangedcyclically around a circumference of the base of the annular element3176. Each tooth can have a helical surface 3178. At the end of thehelical surface 3178 near the base, there can be a valley point 3179,which can be followed by an adjacent tooth, e.g., an abrupt surface ofthe adjacent tooth.

The two annular elements can be concentric around an axis of rotation3151A, with the helical surfaces 3173 and 3178 facing each other.Further, the teeth of the annular elements can be configured so thatpeaks of the teeth of one annular element face helical surfaces ofanother annular element, and valley points of one annular element facehelical surfaces of another annular element.

The rod 3153 can be disposed in the annular elements, such as the axisof the rod coincides with the axes of the annular elements. The rod canbe constrained inside the annular elements, e.g., the rod can move alongthe axis, and can rotate around the axis, without the protruded element.

With the protruded element such as the pin 3154, the rod 3153 is furtherconstrained. For example, the pin can be inserted after the rod has beenplaced in the annular element, so that the pin is disposed between thetwo annular elements. Thus the pin can prevent the rod from beingremoved or separated from the annular elements.

The pin can further limit the movements of the rod, beside theconstraint of limited movements along the axis, due to the teeth of theannular elements preventing the pin from going pass the teeth. The rodcan have limited rotational movements, constrained by the abruptsurfaces or the helical surfaces of the teeth. The rod can rotate acomplete cycle, but only accompanied by axis movements, e.g., when therotational movement is blocked by the teeth, the rod can move along theaxis so that the pin is clear of the teeth before resuming therotational movement.

The helical surfaces of the first and second annular elements can befacing each other, and can be configured to provide a torque to rotatethe rod through the protruded pin. For example, the rod can be pushedinto the first annular element, with the protruded pin then contactingthe helical surfaces of the first annular element. Due to the helicalsurfaces, the protruded pin can slide or roll on the helical surfaces,effectively rotating the rod an angle corresponded to the amount of theprotruded pin sliding or rolling on the helical surfaces, from the pointof contact to the point of rest at the bottom of the helical surfaces.

The rod can be retracted, e.g., a force can be applied for pulling onthe rod. The protruded pin then can be configured to contact the helicalsurfaces of the second annular element. Due to the helical surfaces, theprotruded pin can slide or roll on the helical surfaces, effectivelyrotating the rod another angle corresponded to the amount of theprotruded pin sliding or rolling on the helical surfaces, from the pointof contact to the point of rest at the bottom of the helical surfaces.Thus, by pushing and pulling, the rod can rotate an angle, such as a 90degrees angle.

For example, the pin 3154 can be facing the helical surfaces 3173 and3178, e.g., sandwiching between the helical surface 3173 of the firstannular element 3171 and the helical surface 3178 of the second annularelement 3176.

The rod can be pushed, so that the pin 3154 contacts the helical surface3173 of the first annular element 3171. The pin can then run along thehelical surface 3173 to the valley point 3174. The movement of the pin3154 can cause the rod 3153 to rotate an angle corresponded to thelength of the movement, e.g., the distance that the pin travels on thehelical surface 3173.

The rod can be pulled, so that the pin 3154 contacts the helical surface3178 of the second annular element 3176. The pin can run along thehelical surface 3178 to the valley point 3179 of the second annularelement 3176. The movement of the pin 3154 can cause the rod 3153 torotate an angle corresponded to the length of the movement, e.g., thedistance that the pin travels on the helical surface 3178.

FIG. 31B shows a schematic construction of a first portion 3151 of alocking assembly. The first portion, or the first lockable element caninclude a first annular element 3171 and a second annular element 3176.The annular elements 3171 and 3176 can be placed inside a sleeve 3185.

The first portion can include a rod 3153. One end of the rod can includea hook end or a hookable element 3155, which can include a perpendicularelongated portion having a longer side and a shorter side. A pin 3154can be inserted into the rod, such as after the rod has been placedinside at least the second annular element 3176. Since the secondannular element 3176 is constrained by the pin 3154 and the hook end3155, the second annular element and the rod are coupled together, e.g.,cannot be removed from each other.

The pin can be at any configuration with the regard to the hook end. Asshown, the pin is parallel to the hook end. As such, the pin isconfigured so that when the pin is rested at the valley point of thesecond annular element 3176, the hook end is either parallel (unlockedstate) or perpendicular (locked state) to the parallel hook ends of thehook receptacle.

FIG. 31C shows an assembled first portion 3151 of the locking assemblypartially locked with a second portion 3152 of the locking assembly. Theannular elements 3171 and 3176 are assembled inside a sleeve 3185. A rod3153 can be assembled inside the first and second annular elements, witha pin 3154 between the annular elements. As such, the pin is configuredso that when the pin is rested at the valley point of the first annularelement 3171, the hook end is partially locked to the parallel hook endsof the hook receptacle, e.g., forming a 45 degrees. That way, when therod is further rotated another 45 degrees, the pin is to be rested atthe valley point of the second annular element 3176, the hook end iseither parallel (unlocked state) or perpendicular (locked state) to theparallel hook ends of the hook receptacle.

FIG. 31D shows a cross section AA′ of an assembled first portion 3151 ofthe locking assembly partially locked with a second portion 3152 of thelocking assembly. The cross section is through the pin 3154.

FIGS. 32a -321 illustrate a toggle process from an unlocked state to alocked state according to some embodiments. A locking assembly caninclude a first portion that can be lockable to a second portion. In anunlocked state of the first to the second portion, the first portion canbe removed or separated from the second portion. In a locked state ofthe first to the second portion, the first portion is coupled to thesecond portion, so that the first and second portions move together as aunit, e.g., the first portion cannot be removed or separated from thesecond portion. The first portion can move a short distance relative tothe second portion, such as movements due to the fabrication or designtolerance, or due to the tolerance of the lockability of the twoportions.

The first portion can be coupled, such as fixedly coupled, to a firstmovable component of a clamping device. The second portion can becoupled, such as fixedly coupled, to a second movable component of aclamping device.

The first portion can include two annular elements together with a roddisposed in the annular elements. The rod can have a protruded pin (ormore than one protruded pin) placed between the two annular elements.The rod can have a hook end, which can be a hookable element at or nearan end of the rod. The rod can move a short distance, e.g., constrainedby the movements of the pin, which is blocked by the first and secondannular elements.

The second portion can include a hook receptacle, which can include aparallel hookable feature, which can be mated with the hook end of therod.

Using a set of vertical movements, the locking assembly can changestates, between the locked and the unlocked state. And using the sameset of vertical movements again can change the state again. Thus, theset of vertical movements can toggle the states of the locking assembly.The set of vertical movements can include a downward movement followedby an upward movement of the first portion with respect to the secondportion.

The locking assembly can be in an unlocked state, in which the firstportion is separated from the second portion. In the unlocked state, theclamping device is working to clamp on an object. The first movablecomponent can move down relative to the second component. The downwardmovement of the first moveable component can partially accomplish thetoggling of the unlocked state to the locked state.

In FIG. 32a , the first portion 3251 can be brought toward the secondportion 3252. For example, a hoist can bring the clamping deviceclamping on the object to a destination. The hoist can be lowered toplace the object on the ground. The hoist can further be lowered afterthe object touches the ground. The first movable component of theclamping device can move toward the second movable component, bringingthe first portion of the locking assembly toward the second portion ofthe locking assembly.

The first portion can be disposed so that the axis of the annularelements and of the rod 3253 is perpendicular with the ground, e.g.,parallel to the gravitational force. Thus gravitational force can pullthe rod 3253 downward, so that the pin 3254 can move along a helicalsurface to rest at a valley point of the bottom annular element 3276.The pin location can be configured so that when the pin rests at avalley point of the bottom annular element 3276.

In FIG. 32b , the first portion 3251 can be further lowered toward thesecond portion 3252. For example, the hoist can further lower the firstmovable component toward the second movable component of the clampingdevice, until the rod 3253 is in contact with the hook receptacle 3281.After the rod contacts the hook receptacle, further lowering of thefirst movable component (or the lowering of the first portion 3251 orthe lowering of the two annular elements) can move the two annularelements down on the pin, or the pin moves 3254A relatively up withrespect to the annular elements.

In FIG. 32c , the first portion 3251 can be further lowered toward thesecond portion 3252. The annular elements can move down until the pin3254 completely moved 3254A to contact with the helical surface of thetop annular element 3271.

In FIG. 32d , the first portion 3251 can be further lowered toward thesecond portion 3252. The annular elements can move down, forcing the pinto move 3254B along the helical surface of the top annular element. Themovement 3254B of the pin can rotate 3256A the rod.

In FIG. 32e , the first portion 3251 can be further lowered toward thesecond portion 3252. The annular elements can move down until the pincompletely moved 3254B along the helical surface of the top annularelement, and the rod completes its rotational movement.

The rotational amount of the rod can correspond to the angular distanceof the helical surface traveled in the top annular element. For example,the pin can contact a middle portion of the helical surface, and thentravel to the valley point, which can correspond to about 45 degrees.Thus the rod can rotate about 45 degrees.

In FIG. 32f , the first portion 3251 completes its movement toward thesecond portion 3252, e.g., the two portions cannot move toward eachother anymore. The pin is rested at the valley point 3274 of the topannular element 3271. The rod 3253 rotates about 45 degrees, andpartially hooked with the hook receptacle 3281.

Thus the movement of the first moveable component toward to the secondmovable component has partially accomplished the toggling of theunlocked state to the locked state.

The first movable component can then move up relative to the secondcomponent. The upward movement of the first moveable component cancomplete the toggling of the unlocked state to the locked state.

In FIG. 32g , the first portion 3251 can start move up from the secondportion 3252. For example, the hoist can lift the first movablecomponent upward, which can move away from the second movable componentof the clamping device. The upward movement of the annular elements canmove 3254C the pin away from the top annular element.

In FIG. 32h , the first portion 3251 can be further moved up from thesecond portion 3252. The annular elements can move up until the pin 3254completes its move 3254C to contact with the helical surface of thebottom annular element 3276.

In FIG. 32i , the first portion 3251 can be further moved up from thesecond portion 3252. The annular elements can move up, lifting the rodto move 3256B (since the pin is in contact with the bottom annularelement) until the hookable element of the rod is in contact with thehookable feature of the hook receptacle. This distance can be small,e.g., order of mm, such as 1 mm, 2 mm, 3 mm, 31 mm, or less than 10 mm.

In FIG. 32j , the first portion 3251 can be further moved up from thesecond portion 3252. The annular elements can move up until the pinstarts to move 3254D along the helical surface of the bottom annularelement. The movement 3254D along the helical surface of the pin canrotate 3256C the rod.

In FIG. 32k , the first portion 3251 can be further moved up from thesecond portion 3252. The annular elements can move up until the pincompletes its move 3254D along the helical surface of the bottom annularelement, resting at a valley point of the bottom annular element. Therod also completes its rotational movement. The up movement 3256B of therod and the movement 3254D of the pin along the helical surface canoccur in any order, such as one before the other, or concurrently, e.g.,at a same time.

The rotational amount of the rod can correspond to the angular distanceof the helical surface traveled in the bottom annular element. Forexample, the pin can contact a middle portion of the helical surface,and then travel to the valley point, which can correspond to about 45degrees. Thus the rod can rotate about 45 degrees.

The two rotations 3256A and 3256C can be about 90 degrees, determinedfrom the separation of a tooth in the bottom annular element. In thebeginning of the toggling process (e.g., FIG. 32a ), the pin is at avalley point. After the two rotations 3256A and 3256C, the pin is at anadjacent valley point, separated by a tooth in the bottom annularelement. Thus, if the bottom annular element has 4 teeth with equalspacing, the total rotation angle is 360/4=90 degrees.

In FIG. 32l , the first portion 3251 completes its movement away fromthe second portion 3252, e.g., the two portions cannot move away fromeach other anymore. The pin is rested at the valley point 3279 of thebottom annular element 3276. The rod 3253 rotates further about 45degrees for a complete 90 degrees, and hooked with the hook receptacle3281. Any further up movement can move the first and second portions asa unit, e.g., the top portion is hooked or locked with the bottomportion, and cannot be removed or separated from further up movements.

Thus the movement of the first moveable component away from to thesecond movable component has accomplished the toggling of the unlockedstate to the locked state.

FIGS. 33a -331 illustrate a toggle process from a locked state to anunlocked state according to some embodiments. The toggle process can usea same set of vertical movements, e.g., the set of vertical movementsthat are used to change states from the unlocked state to the lockedstate. The set of vertical movements can include a downward movementfollowed by an upward movement of the first portion with respect to thesecond portion.

The locking assembly can be in a locked state, in which the firstportion is coupled to the second portion. In the locked state, the jawsof the clamping device are widely separated, e.g., the clamping devicedoes not function normally, e.g., in the normal operation that when theclamping device is lifted up, the jaws clamp together, with or withoutan object between the jaws.

The first movable component can move down relative to the secondcomponent. The downward movement of the first moveable component canpartially accomplish the toggling of the locked state to the unlockedstate.

In FIG. 33a , the first portion 3351 can be lifted, which then pulls onthe second portion 3352. For example, a hoist can bring the emptyclamping device, e.g., there is no object between the jaws, to an objectlocation. The jaws can be widely separated, since the first portion islocked to the second portion, which can prevent the jaws from movingtoward each other.

In the locked state, the hookable element of the rod is hooked to thehookable feature of the hook receptacle. The rod can be separated alittle from the bottom side of the hook receptacle. The pin is rested ona valley point of the bottom annular element.

In FIG. 33b , the first portion 3351 can be lowered toward the secondportion 3352. The rod can move down 3356A to make contact with thebottom of the hook receptacle.

For example, the hoist can be lowered to place an object between theopen jaws. The hoist can further be lowered until the clamping devicecontacts the object, which is positioned between the jaws. The hoist canfurther be lowered until the first movable component of the clampingdevice moves toward the second movable component, bringing the hookedrod to be in contact with the bottom side of the hook receptacle, e.g.,from the contact at the hookable feature at the top side of the hookreceptacle.

In FIG. 33c , the first portion 3351 can be further lowered toward thesecond portion 3352. The annular elements can move down until the pin3354 starts to move 3354A to make contact with the helical surface ofthe top annular element 3371.

In FIG. 33d , the first portion 3351 can be further lowered toward thesecond portion 3352. The annular elements can move down until the pin3354 completely moved 3354A to contact with the helical surface of thetop annular element 3371.

In FIG. 33e , the first portion 3351 can be further lowered toward thesecond portion 3352. The annular elements can move down, forcing the pinto start to move 3354B along the helical surface of the top annularelement. The movement 3354B of the pin can rotate 3356B the rod.

In FIG. 33f , the first portion 3351 can be further lowered toward thesecond portion 3352. The annular elements can move down until the pincompletely moved 3354B along the helical surface of the top annularelement, and the rod completes its rotational movement. The pin rests ona valley point of the top annular element. The rod rotates about 45degrees, and remains partially hooked with the hook receptacle 3381.

Thus the movement of the first moveable component toward to the secondmovable component has partially accomplished the toggling of the lockedstate to the unlocked state.

The first movable component can then move up relative to the secondcomponent. The upward movement of the first moveable component cancomplete the toggling of the locked state to the unlocked state.

In FIG. 33g , the first portion 3351 can start move up from the secondportion 3352. For example, the hoist can lift the first movablecomponent upward, which can move away from the second movable componentof the clamping device. The upward movement of the annular elements canstart to move 3354C the pin away from the top annular element.

In FIG. 33h , the first portion 3351 can be further moved up from thesecond portion 3352. The annular elements can move up until the pin 3354completes its move 3354C to contact with the helical surface of thebottom annular element 3376.

In FIG. 33i , the first portion 3351 can be further moved up from thesecond portion 3352. The annular elements can move up, lifting the rodto move 3356C (since the pin is in contact with the bottom annularelement) until the hookable element of the rod is in contact with thehookable feature of the hook receptacle. This distance can be small,e.g., order of mm, such as 1 mm, 2 mm, 3 mm, 31 mm, or less than 10 mm.

In FIG. 33j , the first portion 3351 can be further moved up from thesecond portion 3352. The annular elements can move up until the pinstarts to move 3354D along the helical surface of the bottom annularelement. The movement 3354D along the helical surface of the pin canrotate 3356D the rod.

In FIG. 33k , the first portion 3351 can be further moved up from thesecond portion 3352. The annular elements can move up until the pincompletes its move 3354D along the helical surface of the bottom annularelement, resting at a valley point of the bottom annular element. Therod also completes its rotational movement. The up movement 3356C of therod and the movement 3354D of the pin along the helical surface canoccur in any order, such as one before the other, or concurrently, e.g.,at a same time.

In FIG. 33l , the first portion 3351 can be further moved up from thesecond portion 3352, e.g., the two portions can be separated from eachother, since the hookable element of the rod is not engaged with thehookable feature of the hook receptacle. The pin is rested at the valleypoint of the bottom annular element 3376. The rod 3353 rotates for acomplete 90 degrees, and be separatable from the hook receptacle. Afurther up movement can move the first portion away from the secondportion, allowing the jaws to move toward each other for clamping on theobject.

Thus the movement of the first moveable component away from to thesecond movable component has accomplished the toggling of the lockedstate to the unlocked state.

In some embodiments, the locking assembly can be optimized for improvedreliability, improved operation, and improved fabrication. For example,a pulling force can be higher than a pushing force on the lockingassembly, thus the locking assembly can include a feature for providinghigher support in the pulling direction, which can provide betterreliability for the locking mechanism. The locking assembly can beconfigured to increase a force conversion from vertical movements torotation movements of the rod, to provide better operation of thelocking mechanism. The locking assembly can be configured to reduce afree movement distance, e.g., a distance in which a pulling element ofthe clamping device is pulled up, but without any response from thejaws.

FIGS. 34A-34D illustrate optimized configurations for the lockingassembly according to some embodiments. In FIGS. 34A(a)-34A(c), thelocking assembly can include support features 3485A and 3485B, toaddress an imbalance of forces acting on the locking assembly, such ason the annular elements 3471 and 3476.

In FIGS. 34A(a) and 34A(b), the locking assembly can be coupled, such asfixedly coupled to two movable components 3410 and 3430 of the clampingdevice. For example, the annular elements 3471 and 3476 can be coupledto a top movable component 3410, such as to the pulling element of aclamping device. The hook receptacle 3481 can be coupled to a bottommovable component 3430, such as to the pivot point of a clamping device.

In a first movement, the top movable component can be pushed down on thebottom movable component, for example, by the hoist not pulling orreleasing on the pulling element. Thus the force of the top componentpushing down on the bottom component can be due to the weight of thepulling element. This pushing down force can push the rod 3453 againstthe top annular element 3471, with a force 3461A equaled to the pushingdown force.

In a second movement, the top movable component can be pulled up fromthe bottom movable component, for example, by the hoist pulling on thepulling element. Thus the force of the bottom component pulling on thetop component can be due to the weight of the jaw assembly. This pullingup force can pull the rod 3453 against the bottom annular element 3476,with a force 3461B equaled to the pulling up force.

The force 3461B pulling on the bottom annular element can be higher thanthe force 3461A pushing on the top annular element from the rod. Thusthe bottom annular element can be supported from a bottom side.

A sleeve 3485 can be used to house the annular elements 3471 and 3476.The sleeve can have a support element 3485A at a bottom side of thesleeve, on an inner surface, to support the bottom annular element. Pin3471A can be used to secure the annular element 3471 to the sleeve 3485.Pin 3476A can be used to secure the annular element 3476 to the sleeve3485.

In fabrication, the annular elements can be inserted into the sleevefrom a top side, first the bottom annular element inserted first,followed by the second annular element. Pins 3471A and 3476A can be usedto secure the two annular elements with the sleeve.

In operation, the support element 3485A can prevent the bottom annularelement from moving down, e.g., supporting the bottom annular elementagainst the pulling down force exerted by the rod. The pin 3476A can beused to add to the support of the bottom annular element, such as toprevent the bottom annular element from moving up. The pin 3471A canprevent the top annular element from moving up, e.g., securing the topannular element against the pushing force exerted by the rod.

The sleeve 3485 can further have another support element 3485B at a topside of the sleeve, on an outer surface, to support the both annularelements on the top movable component 3410. This support element 3485Bcan support the sleeve 3485 on the top movable component. Infabrication, the sleeve, with the annular elements installed, can beinserted into the top movable component from a top side, so that thesupport element 3485B rested on a mating feature in the top component.Optional secured elements, such as a pin can be used to secure thesleeve with the top component. Press fit process can also be used.

FIGS. 34B(a)-34B(b) shows configurations for different angles 3463A and3463B of the teeth 3472 on an annular element 3471, such as the angles3463A and 3463B of the helical surface 3473 of the teeth 3472 makingwith a horizontal surface of the annular element 3471, which is asurface perpendicular to the axis of the annular element. A force fromthe pin pushing on the helical surface 3473 can be decomposed into anormal force, and a parallel force 3462A or 3462B, which is the forcefor moving the pin along the helical surface for rotating the rod.

For small angle 3463A (FIG. 34B(a)), the parallel force 3462A can besmall, as compared to the parallel force 3462B caused by the largerangle 3463B (FIG. 34B(b)). From these configurations, a larger angle ispreferred for ease of rotating the rod, which can be the activationforce for toggling the locking mechanism.

FIGS. 34B(c)-34B(d) shows configurations for different angles 3463C and3463D of the teeth on an annular element, e.g., the angles of thehelical surface of the teeth making with a horizontal surface of theannular element. A pin can move from a valley point of the bottomannular element, along a helical surface of a tooth on the bottomannular element, and up to rest on a valley point of the top annularelement. The total vertical distance 3465A or 3465B can be the distancethat the annular elements move with respect to the rod, e.g., when therod is locked with the hook receptacle, the movements of the pin withrespect to the annular elements can be regarded as the movements of theannular elements while keeping the rod stationary. Thus, the top movablecomponent 3410 (which is coupled to the annular elements) can move downa distance 3465A or 3465B with respect to the bottom movable component3430 (which is coupled to the hook receptacle, which can be locked tothe rod). In other words, the distance 3465A or 3465B can be thebacklash distance when the top component reverses directions. Thebacklash distance can be the distance that the top component movedrelative to the bottom component, in order to toggle the states of thelocking assembly. The backlash distance 3465A or 3465B can be as smallas possible, in order to improve the operation of the locking mechanism.

For large angle 3463C (FIG. 34B(c)), the backlash distance 3465A can belarge, as compared to the backlash distance 3465B caused by the smallerangle 3463D (FIG. 34B(d)). From these configurations, a smaller angle ispreferred for better operation of the locking mechanism.

As shown in FIG. 34B(e), the locking assembly can be configured so thatthe teeth of the annular elements can be optimized for large parallelforces and small backlash distances. The angles of the teeth, e.g., theangles between the helical surfaces and the plane perpendicular to theaxis of the annular elements, can be between 30 and 60 degrees, orbetween 35 and 55 degrees, or between 40 and 50 degrees, or can be about45 degrees.

FIG. 34B(f) shows a configuration of the annular elements, which areembedded in a sleeve. A tooth 3477 can have a helical surface 3478,rising from a valley point 3479 at a base of the annular element 3476,and an abrupt surface which is terminated at a valley point of anadjacent tooth. The helical surface can be configured to form a constantangle with the axis 3351A of the annular elements.

FIGS. 34C(a) and 34C(b) show configurations for improving backlashdistance of the annular elements relative to the rod. If the annularelements are positioned farther apart, e.g., separated by a distance3467A, the backlash distance can be larger, as compared to a closerannular element separation 3467B. A minimum backlash distance can beobtained by placing the two annular elements close together, withminimum clearance 3467C for the pin 3454 to pass the peak of the teethof an annular element (such as the top annular element as shown) whiletraveling on the helical surface of the teeth of the other annularelement (such as the bottom annular element as shown). The clearancedistance can be the distance between the pin and the opposite slantingsurface, e.g., the clearance space on the path of the pin while movingon the slanting surface. The clearance distance can be less than 10 mm,less than 5 mm, or less than 2 mm.

FIGS. 34D(a) and 34D(b) show configurations for improving backlashdistance and ease of traveling for the pin. For example, if the abruptsurface of the teeth is vertical, e.g., parallel to the path traveled bythe pin when moving from the helical surface on one annular element tothe valley point of the other annular element, the pin might get caughtby the peak of the teeth. Thus, a recess 3468A of the teeth abruptsurface can improve a reliability of the operation of the lockingassembly, by preventing the peak of the teeth from interfering with thepin. The recess 3468A can be a small angle from the vertical distance,such as from the axis of rotation of the annular elements. The angle ofthe recess 3468A can be less than 10 degrees, less than 5 degrees, orless than 2 degrees.

A rounding 3468C of the peak of the teeth of the annular elements canfurther remove the backlash distance, by allowing the annular elementsto be positioned closer, e.g., the clearance distance 3467D can besmaller than the clearance distance 3467C in the case of sharp teeth.Alternatively, the peaks of the teeth can be trimmed 3468B at an angleparallel to the angle of the helical surface. The trim 3468B can occuron a portion of the helical surface that the pin does not travel, e.g.,the peak portion of the teeth away from the location where the pinleaves the helical surface to travel vertically to the valley point ofthe other annular element. The parallel angle can allow the pin to passthe peaks with a uniform clearance, using a trimmed peak 3468D of theteeth.

In some embodiments, the automatic locking assembly can be configured sothat two slanting surfaces can face away from each other. There can betwo or more curve shape elements that are configured to mate with theslanting surfaces, such as two protruded pins from a rod. The twoslanting surfaces can be disposed between the two protruded pins, sothat a first protruded pin interfaces with a first slanting surface anda second protruded pin interfaces with a second slanting surface. Theslanting surface can be a curve slanting surface, such as a helicalsurface. The movements of the protruded pins along the slanting surfacecan rotate the rod, e.g., when the pins run along the helical surface.

The first slanting surface can be configured to accept the firstprotruded pin in a first moving direction of the pins or of the slantingsurface, and then move the first protruded pin along the first slantingsurface.

The second slanting surface can be configured to accept the secondprotruded pin. The second slanting surface can move the second protrudedpin along the second slanting surface, for example, a helical surface,such as rotating the rod by the second protruded pin running along thehelical surface.

FIGS. 35A-35E illustrate another schematic configuration for a lockingmechanism or assembly according to some embodiments. The lockingmechanism can employ a slanting interface for repeatedly rotating a rodthrough a repeatedly set of vertical forces.

In some embodiments, the locking mechanism can include two lockableelements, such as a rod with a hook end and a hook receptacle. Dependingon the orientation of the hook end, the rod can be unseparatable fromthe hook receptacle, or the rod can move independent of the receptacle.

FIG. 35A shows a schematic detail of a first portion 3551 of a lockingassembly using slanting interfaces. The locking assembly can include twoportions 3551 and 3552, forming two lockable elements. A first portioncan include a rod 3553, placed in an annular element 3570. The annularelement 3570 can have opposite slanting surfaces, such as cyclic teethon two opposite sides. The annular element 3570 can include two annularelements 3571 and 3576 secured together with the slanting surfacesfacing opposite directions. The annular element 3570 can be a one pieceannular element having slanting surfaces on opposite sides. A secondportion can include a hook receptacle 3581.

The first portion of a locking assembly can include a slanting surfaceinteracting element, such as a rod 3553. One end of the rod can includea hook end or a hookable element 3555, which can include a perpendicularelongated portion having a longer side 3555A and a shorter side 3555B.By rotating the rod, such as a 90 degree angle for this elongated hookelement 3555, the status of the lock can be toggle between locked andunlocked states.

The rod 3553 can include at least two protruded elements, such as twopins 3554A and 3554B, which can be passing through the rod and protrudedfrom both sides of the rod.

The annular element 3570 can include a ring-like element, with slantingsurfaces in the form of helical surfaces. The annular element 3570 canhave a hollow cylindrical shape, such as a ring or a hollow cylinder,with an axis of rotation 3551A. The annular element can have cyclicteeth, e.g., teeth configured around the circumference of the annularelement. The number of teeth can be dividable by 2 or by 4, such as 4teeth or 12 teeth. The teeth can have helical surfaces rising from abase of the annular elements, followed by abrupt surfaces going backdown to the base, after reaching peaks of the teeth. The other end ofthe helical surfaces can reach valley points, before followed by theabrupt surfaces of the adjacent teeth.

At one side, the annular element 3570 can have multiple teeth 3572, suchas 4 teeth arranged cyclically around a circumference of the base of theannular element 3570. Each tooth can have a helical surface 3573. At theend of the helical surface 3573 near the base, there can be a valleypoint 3574, which can be followed by an adjacent tooth, e.g., an abruptsurface of the adjacent tooth.

At an opposite side, the annular element 3570 can have 4 teeth 3577,arranged cyclically around a circumference of the base of the annularelement 3576. Each tooth can have a helical surface 3578. At the end ofthe helical surface 3578 near the base, there can be a valley point3579, which can be followed by an adjacent tooth, e.g., an abruptsurface of the adjacent tooth.

The annular element 3570 can have teeth 3572 and 3577, and helicalsurfaces 3573 and 3578, facing each other. Further, the teeth of theannular element can be configured so that peaks of the teeth in one sideare aligned along the axis of rotation 3551A with helical surfaces ofteeth in an opposite side, and valley points of teeth in one side arealigned along the axis of rotation 3551A with helical surfaces of teethin an opposite side.

The rod 3553 can be disposed in the annular element, such as the axis ofthe rod coincides with the axes of the annular element 3551A. The rodcan be constrained inside the annular elements, e.g., the rod can movealong the axis, and can rotate around the axis, in the absence of theprotruded elements.

With the protruded elements such as the pins 3554A and 3554B, the rod3553 is further constrained. For example, the pins can be inserted afterthe rod has been placed in the annular element, so that the pins aredisposed surrounding the annular element. Thus the pins can prevent therod from being removed or separated from the annular element.

The pins can further limit the movements of the rod, beside theconstraint of limited movements along the axis, due to the teeth of theannular element preventing the pins from going pass the teeth. The rodcan have limited rotational movements, constrained by the abruptsurfaces or the helical surfaces of the teeth. The rod can rotate acomplete cycle, but only accompanied by axis movements, e.g., when therotational movement is blocked by the teeth, the rod can move along theaxis so that the pins are clear of the teeth before resuming therotational movement.

The helical surfaces on the two sides of the annular element can befacing away from each other, and can be configured to provide a torqueto rotate the rod through the protruded pins. For example, the rod canbe pushed in one direction toward the annular element, with oneprotruded pin then contacting the helical surfaces of one side of theannular element. Due to the helical surfaces, the protruded pin canslide or roll on the helical surfaces, effectively rotating the rod anangle corresponded to the amount of the protruded pin sliding or rollingon the helical surfaces, from the point of contact to the point of restat the bottom of the helical surfaces.

The rod can be retracted, e.g., pushing in an opposite direction towardthe annular element. The other protruded pin then can be configured tocontact the helical surfaces of the opposite side of the annularelement. Due to the helical surfaces, the protruded pin can slide orroll on the helical surfaces, effectively rotating the rod another anglecorresponded to the amount of the protruded pin sliding or rolling onthe helical surfaces, from the point of contact to the point of rest atthe bottom of the helical surfaces. Thus, by pushing and pulling, therod can rotate an angle, such as a 90 degrees angle.

For example, the pin 3554A can be facing the helical surface 3573, andthe pin 3554B can be facing the helical surface 3578, e.g., the helicalsurfaces 3573 and 3578 of the annular element 3570 can be disposedbetween the two pins 3554A and 3554B.

The rod can be pushed, so that the pin 3554A contacts the helicalsurface 3573 of the annular element 3570. The pin can then run along thehelical surface 3573 to the valley point 3574. The movement of the pin3554A can cause the rod 3553 to rotate an angle corresponded to thelength of the movement, e.g., the distance that the pin travels on thehelical surface 3573.

The rod can be pulled, so that the pin 3554B contacts the helicalsurface 3578 of the annular element 3570. The pin can run along thehelical surface 3578 to the valley point 3579 of the annular element3570. The movement of the pin 3554B can cause the rod 3553 to rotate anangle corresponded to the length of the movement, e.g., the distancethat the pin travels on the helical surface 3578.

FIG. 35B shows a schematic construction of a first portion 3551 of alocking assembly. The first portion can include an annular element 3570,placed inside a sleeve 3585. A hole 3570A can be formed in the annularelement 3570, which can accept a pin 3570B for securing the annularelement 3570 with the sleeve 3585. The first portion can include a rod3553. One end of the rod can include a hookable element 3555, which caninclude a perpendicular elongated portion having a longer side and ashorter side. Pins 3554A and 3554B can be inserted into the rod, such asafter the rod has been placed inside the annular element 3570. Since theannular element 3570 is constrained by the pins 3554A and 3554B, theannular element and the rod are coupled together, e.g., cannot beremoved from each other.

The pins can be at any configuration with the regard to the hook end. Asshown, the pins are parallel to the hook end. As such, the pin isconfigured so that when the pin is rested at the valley point of theteeth in a bottom side of the annular element 3570, the hook end iseither parallel (unlocked state) or perpendicular (locked state) to theparallel hook ends of the hook receptacle.

FIG. 35C shows an assembled first portion 3551 of the locking assembly.FIG. 35D shows an assembled first portion 3551 of the locking assemblypartially locked with a second portion 3552 of the locking assembly. Theannular element 3570 is assembled inside a sleeve 3585. A rod 3553 canbe assembled inside the annular element, with pins 3554A and 3554Bsandwiching the annular element. As such, the pins are configured sothat when the pin 3554B is rested at the valley point of the bottomteeth of the annular element, the hook end is partially locked to theparallel hook ends of the hook receptacle, e.g., forming a 45 degrees.That way, when the pin is further rotated another 45 degrees, to berested at the valley point of the top teeth of the annular element, thehook end is either parallel (unlocked state) or perpendicular (lockedstate) to the parallel hook ends of the hook receptacle.

FIG. 35E shows a cross section BB′ of an assembled first portion 3551 ofthe locking assembly partially locked with a second portion 3552 of thelocking assembly. The cross section is through the pins 3554A and 3554B.

FIGS. 36A-36C illustrate a toggle process from an unlocked state to alocked state according to some embodiments. FIGS. 36A(a)-36C(a) showperspective views, and FIGS. 36A(b)-36C(b) show side views, of thetoggle process. A locking assembly can include a first portion that canbe lockable to a second portion. The first portion can include anannular element together with a rod disposed in the annular element. Therod can have two protruded pins (or more than two protruded pins) placedsurrounding the annular element. The rod can have a hook end. The secondportion can include a hook receptacle, which can include a parallelhookable feature, which can be mated with the hook end of the rod.

In FIGS. 36A(a)-36A(b), the first portion can be removable from thesecond portion, with the hook end 3655 of the rod 3653 parallel with theparallel hookable feature of the hook receptacle 3681. Top pin 3654A canbe rested on a valley point of the top teeth 3672 of the annular element3670.

In FIGS. 36B(a)-36B(b), the first portion can be brought down on thesecond portion. Bottom pin 3654B contacts helical surface of bottomteeth 3677 of the annular element 3670. Bottom pin 3654B further movesalong the helical surface to rest on a valley point of the bottom teeth3677 of the annular element 3670. Rod 3653 is rotated a 45 degree angle,so that the hook end 3655 is partially hooked on the hook receptacle.

In FIGS. 36C(a)-36C(b), the first portion can be brought up away fromthe second portion. Top pin 3654A contacts helical surface of top teeth3672 of the annular element 3670. Top pin 3654A further moves along thehelical surface to rest on a valley point of the top teeth 3672 of theannular element 3670. Rod 3653 is rotated another 45 degree angle, for atotal of 90 degrees, so that the hook end 3655 is hooked on the hookreceptacle. The locking assembly has completed its toggling process froman unlocked state to a locked state.

FIGS. 37A-37C illustrate a toggle process from a locked state to anunlocked state according to some embodiments. FIGS. 37A(a)-37C(a) showperspective views, and FIGS. 37A(b)-37C(b) show side views, of thetoggle process. The toggle process can use a same set of verticalmovements, e.g., the set of vertical movements that are used to changestates from the unlocked state to the locked state, which includes adownward movement followed by an upward movement of the first portionwith respect to the second portion.

In FIGS. 37A(a)-37A(b), the first portion can be locked with the secondportion, with the hook end 3755 of the rod 3753 hooked with the parallelhookable feature of the hook receptacle 3781. Top pin 3754A can berested on a valley point of the top teeth 3772 of the annular element3770.

In FIGS. 37B(a)-37B(b), the first portion can be brought down on thesecond portion. Bottom pin 3754B contacts helical surface of bottomteeth 3777 of the annular element 3770. Bottom pin 3754B further movesalong the helical surface to rest on a valley point of the bottom teeth3777 of the annular element 3770. Rod 3753 is rotated a 45 degree angle,so that the hook end 3755 is partially hooked on the hook receptacle.

In FIGS. 37C(a)-37C(b), the first portion can be brought up away fromthe second portion. Top pin 3754A contacts helical surface of top teeth3772 of the annular element 3770. Top pin 3754A further moves along thehelical surface to rest on a valley point of the top teeth 3772 of theannular element 3770. Rod 3753 is rotated another 45 degree angle, for atotal of 90 degrees, so that the hook end 3755 is separatable from thehook receptacle, e.g., the hook end is parallel with the parallelhookable feature of the hook receptacle. The locking assembly hascompleted its toggling process from a locked state to an unlocked state.

In some embodiments, the locking assembly can be optimized for improvedreliability, improved operation, and improved fabrication.

FIGS. 38A-38D illustrate optimized configurations for the lockingassembly according to some embodiments. In FIGS. 38A(a)-38A(d), thelocking assembly can include support features 3885A and 3885B, toaddress an imbalance of forces acting on the locking assembly, such ason the annular element 3870.

In FIGS. 38A(a) and 38A(b), the locking assembly can be coupled, such asfixedly coupled to two movable components 3810 and 3830 of the clampingdevice. For example, the annular element 3870 can be coupled to a topmovable component 3810, such as to the pulling element of a clampingdevice (for example, as in a configuration shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B).The hook receptacle 3881 can be coupled to a bottom movable component3830, such as to the pivot point of a clamping device (for example, asin a configuration shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B).

In a first movement, the top movable component can be pushed down on thebottom movable component, for example, by the hoist not pulling orreleasing on the pulling element. Thus the force of the top componentpushing down on the bottom component can be due to the weight of thepulling element. This pushing down force can push the rod 3853 againstthe top teeth 3872 of the annular element 3870, with a force 3861Aequaled to the pushing down force.

In a second movement, the top movable component can be pulled up fromthe bottom movable component, for example, by the hoist pulling on thepulling element. Thus the force of the bottom component pulling on thetop component can be due to the weight of the jaw assembly. This pullingup force can pull the rod 3853 against the bottom teeth 3877 of theannular element 3870, with a force 3861B equaled to the pulling upforce.

The force 3861B pulling up on the annular element can be higher than theforce 3861A pushing down on the annular element from the rod. Thus theannular element can be supported from a bottom side.

A sleeve 3885 can be used to house the annular element 3870. The sleevecan have a support element 3885A at a bottom side of the sleeve, on aninner surface, to support the bottom side of the annular element. Pin3870A can be used to secure the annular element 3870 to the sleeve 3885.

In fabrication, the annular element can be inserted into the sleeve froma top side. Pins 3870A can be used to secure the annular element withthe sleeve.

In operation, the support element 3885A can prevent the annular elementfrom moving down, e.g., supporting the annular element from a bottomside against the pulling down force exerted by the rod. The pin 3870Acan be used to add to the support of the annular element, such as toprevent the annular element from moving up.

The sleeve 3885 can further have another support element 3885B at a topside of the sleeve, on an outer surface, to support the annular elementon the top movable component 3810. This support element 3885B cansupport the sleeve 3885 on the top movable component. The top movablecomponent 1310 can have a support element 3885C at a bottom side, on aninner surface, to support the sleeve.

In assembling, the sleeve, with the annular element installed andsecured with the pin 3870A, can be inserted into the top movablecomponent from a top side, so that the support element 3885B rested on amating feature in the top component. Optional secured elements, such asa pin or a top plate, can be used to secure the sleeve with the topcomponent. Press fit process can also be used.

The locking assembly, including the annular element, the protruded pinsinstalled to the rod, and the rod installed within the annular element,can be installed in a top movable component, e.g., without a sleeve. Inassembling, the rod can be inserted to the annular element, followed bythe pins inserted into the rod. The locking assembly can be insertedinto the top movable component from a top side, to rest on the supportelement 3885D. Optional secured element, such as sleeve 3870B, can beinserted to prevent the locking assembly from moving out of the topmovable element.

FIGS. 38B(a)-38B(b) shows configurations for different angles 3863A and3863B of the teeth 3877 on an annular element 3870, such as the angles3863A and 3863B of the helical surface 3873 of the teeth 3877 makingwith a horizontal surface of the annular element 3870, which is asurface perpendicular to the axis of the annular element. A force fromthe pin pushing on the helical surface 3873 can be decomposed into anormal force, and a parallel force 3862A or 3862B, which is the forcefor moving the pin along the helical surface for rotating the rod.

For small angle 3863A (FIG. 38B(a)), the parallel force 3862A can besmall, as compared to the parallel force 3862B caused by the largerangle 3863B (FIG. 38B(b)). From these configurations, a larger angle ispreferred for ease of rotating the rod, which can be the activationforce for toggling the locking mechanism.

FIGS. 38B(c)-38B(d) shows configurations for different angles 3863C and3863D of the teeth on an annular element, e.g., the angles of thehelical surface of the teeth making with a horizontal surface of theannular element. A bottom pin can move from a valley point of the bottomteeth of the annular element, along a helical surface of a tooth on thebottom teeth of the annular element, and up to rest on a valley point.The total vertical distance 3865A or 3865B can be the distance that theannular elements move with respect to the rod, e.g., when the rod islocked with the hook receptacle, the movements of the pin with respectto the annular elements can be regarded as the movements of the annularelements while keeping the rod stationary. Thus, the top movablecomponent 3810 (which is coupled to the annular elements) can move downa distance 3865A or 3865B with respect to the bottom movable component3830 (which is coupled to the hook receptacle, which can be locked tothe rod). In other words, the distance 3865A or 3865B can be thebacklash distance when the top component reverses directions. Thebacklash distance can be the distance that the top component movedrelative to the bottom component, in order to toggle the states of thelocking assembly. The backlash distance 3865A or 3865B can be as smallas possible, in order to improve the operation of the locking mechanism.

For large angle 3863C (FIG. 38B(c)), the backlash distance 3865A can belarge, as compared to the backlash distance 3865B caused by the smallerangle 3863D (FIG. 38B(d)). From these configurations, a smaller angle ispreferred for better operation of the locking mechanism.

As shown in FIG. 38B(e), the locking assembly can be configured so thatthe teeth of the annular elements can be optimized for large parallelforces and small backlash distances. The angles of the teeth, e.g., theangles between the helical surfaces and the plane perpendicular to theaxis of the annular elements, can be between 30 and 100 degrees, orbetween 35 and 95 degrees, or between 40 and 90 degrees, or can be about45 degrees.

FIG. 38B(f) shows a configuration of the annular elements, which areembedded in a sleeve. A tooth 3872 can have a helical surface 3873,rising from a valley point 3874 at a base of the annular element 3870,and an abrupt surface which is terminated at a valley point of anadjacent tooth. The helical surface can be configured to form a constantangle with the axis 3851A of the annular elements.

FIGS. 38C(a) and 38C(b) show configurations for improving backlashdistance of the annular elements relative to the rod. If the annularelements are positioned farther apart, e.g., separated by a distance3867A, the backlash distance can be larger, as compared to a closerannular element separation 3867B. A minimum backlash distance can beobtained by placing the two pins close together, with minimum clearance3867D for the pin 3854A to pass the peak of the teeth of an annularelement (as compared to a larger clearance 3867C) while traveling on thehelical surface of the teeth of the other annular element. The clearancedistance can be the distance between the pin and the opposite slantingsurface, e.g., the clearance space on the path of the pin while movingon the slanting surface. The clearance distance can be less than 10 mm,less than 5 mm, or less than 2 mm.

FIGS. 38D(a) and 38D(b) show configurations for improving backlashdistance and ease of traveling for the pin. For example, if the abruptsurface of the teeth is vertical, e.g., parallel to the path traveled bythe pin when moving from the helical surface on one annular element tothe valley point of the other annular element, the pin might get caughtby the peak of the teeth. Thus, a recess 3868A of the teeth abruptsurface can improve a reliability of the operation of the lockingassembly, by preventing the peak of the teeth from interfering with thepin. The recess 3868A can be a small angle from the vertical distance,such as from the axis of rotation of the annular elements. The angle ofthe recess 3868A can be less than 10 degrees, less than 9 degrees, orless than 2 degrees.

A rounding 3868C of the peak of the teeth of the annular elements canfurther remove the backlash distance, by allowing the annular elementsto be positioned closer, e.g., the clearance distance 3867E can besmaller than the clearance distance 3867D in the case of sharp teeth.Alternatively, the peaks of the teeth can be trimmed 3868B at an angleparallel to the angle of the helical surface. The trim 3868B can occuron a portion of the helical surface that the pin does not travel, e.g.,the peak portion of the teeth away from the location where the pinleaves the helical surface to travel vertically to the valley point ofthe other annular element. The parallel angle can allow the pin to passthe peaks with a uniform clearance, using a trimmed peak 3868D of theteeth.

In some embodiments, the hook end of the rod in the locking assembly canbe optimized for improved reliability and improved operation.

FIGS. 39A-39C illustrate a locking feature of the hook end of a rod witha hookable feature of a hook receptacle according to some embodiments.FIGS. 39A(a) and 39A(b) show unlocked and locked states of the lockingfeature. The hook end 3955 can have an elongated portion 3955A and ashort portion 3955B. In the unlocked state (FIG. 39A(a)), the hook end3955 of the rod 3953 can have the elongated portion 3955A parallel withthe parallel hookable feature 3981A of the hook receptacle 3981. In thelocked state (FIG. 39A(b)), the hook end 3955 of the rod 3953 can havethe elongated portion 3955A perpendicular to the parallel hookablefeature 3981A of the hook receptacle 3981.

In FIGS. 39B(a) and 39B(b), the elongated portion 3955A of the hook end3955 can be rounded to be less than a circle 3958, which is defined bythe farthest point of the elongated portion with respect to the axis ofrotation. That way, when the rod rotates, the circle 3958 represents alargest that the hook end occupies.

In FIGS. 39C(a) and 39C(b), the bottom portion 3957 of the hook end 3955can be rounded, such as to present a minimum contact with the bottomside of the hook. The bottom portion 3957 can include an arc having asmall radius, protruded from the bottom side of the hook end. The lengthor diameter of the arc can be less than 50%, less than 40%, less than30%, less than 20%, or less than 10% of the dimension of the rod. Thatway, when the rod rotates, the rod can experience a minimum friction dueto the minimization of contact surface area.

FIGS. 40A-40D illustrate a toggling configuration of the lockingmechanism according to some embodiments. A clamping device 4000 can beused for lifting and transferring objects, using a linkage mechanismbetween a pulling element coupled to a hoist and the jaws of theclamping device. The linkage mechanism can include a scissor mechanismin which two scissor arms 4030 can pivot around a pivot point 4031. Oneends of the scissor arms can be coupled together to the pulling element4010. The other ends of the scissor arms can be coupled to two jaws 4060and 4040. When the pulling element is pulled up with respect to thepivot point, the pulling force on the ends of the scissor arms can movethe jaws together for clamping on an object 4020 disposed between thejaws. When the pulling element is lowered down with respect to the pivotpoint, the lowering force on the ends of the scissor arms can move thejaws away from each other to separate the distance between the jaws,effectively releasing the object.

An automatic locking mechanism can be installed in the clamping device.The automatic locking mechanism can be configured to enable and disablethe linkage mechanism, such as the scissor mechanism in the scissorclamping device. For example, the locking mechanism can secure acomponent of the linkage mechanism to a body of the clamping device,thus can effectively prevent the linkage mechanism from moving. In thisstate, the clamping device cannot actuate the jaws by pulling orlowering the pulling device. Alternatively, the locking mechanism cansecure components of the linkage mechanism, such as securing twoportions 4030A and 4030B of scissor arm 4030. When the portion 4030A isfixed with portion 4030B, one end of the scissor arms cannot move whenthe pulling element is pulled up or lowered down, effectively disablethe linkage mechanism.

A scissor clamping device can have an automatic locking mechanism 4050,which can include 2 portions 4051 and 4052, which can be securedtogether (in locked or engaged stated), or can be separated from eachother (in unlocked or disengaged state). The locking mechanism can be atoggle mechanism, which can change between locked and unlocked statesafter being triggered or activated. The trigger or activation can be aforce acting on one or both portions 4051 and 4052 of the lockingmechanism. With the locking mechanism incorporated into the scissorclamping device, a force on the pulling element can activate thetoggling process between the locked and unlocked states.

The locking mechanism can include a hook rod 4053 and a mating hookreceptacle 4081. The hook rod can have a hook end 4055, such as anasymmetric shape, e.g., a shape having an elongated portion and ashortened portion, such as an oval or a rectangular shape. The hookreceptacle can have a mating hook end 4081A that is configured tohook/secure or unhook/release on the hook end of the hook rod. Thus,when the rod rotates, the locking (hooked) and unlocking (released)states can be toggled. For example, the rod can be positioned so thatthe elongated portion of the hook end engaged with the mating hook endof the hook receptacle, locking the rod with the hook receptacle. Whenthe rod rotates 90 degrees, the elongated portion is now parallel withthe hook receptacle, and the shortened portion does not engage with thehook end of the hook receptacle. This releases the rod from the hookreceptacle. Rotating the rod 90 degrees again, in either rotationdirection, can re-engage the lock by mating the elongated portion withthe hook.

The automatic locking mechanism can include two slanting surfaceelements, such as annular elements 4071 and 4076 each having one or moreslanting surface in the form of helical surfaces. The hook rod can bedisposed between the annular elements and can travel along an axis ofthe annular elements. One or more slanting surface interacting element,such as protruded pin 4054, can be disposed facing the slanting surfacesof the annular elements.

As shown, the annular elements can be configured so that the slantingsurfaces are facing each other, with the protruded element disposedbetween the slanting surfaces. The protruded pin can move toward thefirst annular element, in a first direction, for interacting with theslanting surfaces of the first annular element. The protruded pin canmove toward the second annular element, in an opposite direction withthe first direction, for interacting with the slanting surfaces of thesecond annular element. The locking mechanism can be similar to theconfiguration shown in FIGS. 5A-5D.

Alternatively, the annular elements can be configured so that theslanting surfaces are facing away from each other. There can be twoprotruded pins, with a first protruded pin disposed facing the slantingsurfaces of the first annular element, and a second protruded pindisposed facing the slanting surfaces of the second annular element. Thefirst protruded pin can move toward the first annular element, in afirst direction, for interacting with the slanting surfaces of the firstannular element. The second protruded pin can move toward the secondannular element, in an opposite direction with the first direction, forinteracting with the slanting surfaces of the second annular element.The first and second annular elements can be integrated together, toform an annular element having slanting surfaces protruded from bothsides of the annular element. The locking mechanism can be similar tothe configuration shown in FIGS. 9A-9D.

FIG. 40A shows a scissor clamping device having an automatic lockingmechanism 4050, such as the locking mechanism shown previously. Otherlocking mechanism can be used, such as the locking mechanism shownpreviously. The top portion 4051 of the locking mechanism is coupled toa first portion 4010 of a scissor arm of the clamping device, such as tothe pulling element. The bottom portion 4052 of the locking mechanism iscoupled to a second portion 4031 of the scissor arm, such as the pivotpoint. The automatic locking mechanism can be coupled to differentportions of the clamping device, such as automatic locking mechanism4050A coupled to two portions 4030A and 4030B of one side of the scissorarm, or automatic locking mechanism 4050B coupled to two portions 4030Bof two sides of the scissor arm.

As shown, the locking mechanism is in an engaged state, e.g., the topportion 4051 is secured to the bottom portion 4052. Thus, the pullingelement is secured to the pivot point 4031, e.g., to the body of theclamping device, with only limited movements as configured by thelocking mechanism. For example, since the rod 4053 can move between theslanting surfaces of the first and second annular elements 4071 and4076, for toggling the locking status of the locking mechanism, thepulling element can move with respect to the body of the clamping devicefor activating or deactivating the locking mechanism. Thus, in thepresent specification, components are secured together does not meanthat the components are rigidly and fixedly attached to each other. Theterm “components are secured together” can mean that a component of thecomponents cannot move freely relative to another component of thecomponents, such as being removed or separated from each other, and canmean that the components can have limited movements relative to eachother.

Due to the locked status of the locking mechanism, the pulling elementis secured to the clamping device body. The coupling of the pullingelement to the clamping device body can keep the jaws immobilized at alarge separation, in order to accept an object between the jaws.

The clamping device can be brought down, for example, by lowering ahoist coupled to the pulling element. The object 4020 can be positionedbetween the open jaws of the clamping device.

The hoist can lower further, after the clamping device has contacted theobject. Since the clamping device has contacted the object, lowering thehoist does not move down the body of the clamping device. Instead,lowering the hoist can move the pulling element down. The first portion4030A of the scissor arm can move down with respect to the secondportion 4030B of the scissor arm. The movement of the first portion4030A can move the annular element assembly down, until the protrudedpin in the rod contact the slanting surface of the top (or second)annular element. The rod can rotate an angle such as 45 degrees.

In FIG. 40B, the hoist can lift up. The first portion 4030A of thescissor arm can move up with respect to the second portion 4030B of thescissor arm. The movement of the first portion 4030A can move theannular element assembly up, until the protruded pin in the rod contactthe slanting surface of the bottom (or first) annular element. The rodcan rotate another angle such as 45 degrees. The rod can thus rotate acomplete angle of 90 degrees, which can switch the locked status to theunlocked status, since the hook end of the rod is no longer beconstrained by the hook end of the hook receptacle after a 90 degreerotation.

In FIG. 40C, the hoist can further lift up. Since the locking mechanismis now disabled, pulling on the pulling element can activate the jawsfor clamping on the object.

In FIG. 40D, after the jaws clamp on the object, the hoist can furtherlift up and move to a destination at which the object can be released.

Thus, by bring down and then bring up the pulling element, the lockingmechanism changes state from a locked state to an unlock state. Therecan be pauses between the steps.

FIGS. 41A-41D illustrate another toggling configuration of the lockingmechanism according to some embodiments. A clamping device 4100 can havescissor arms 4130 pivotable around a pivot point 4131, linking a pullingelement 4110 to two jaws 4160 and 4140.

The clamping device can have an automatic locking mechanism 4150, whichcan include a first portion 4151 and a second portion 4152. The lockingmechanism can include a hook rod 4153 having a hook end 4155 and amating hook receptacle 4181 having a hook end 4181A. The lockingmechanism can include two slanting surface elements, such as annularelements 4171 and 4176. One or more slanting surface interactingelement, such as protruded pin 4154 in the hook rod, can be disposedfacing the slanting surfaces of the annular elements.

FIG. 41A shows a scissor clamping device having an automatic lockingmechanism 4150, such as the locking mechanism shown previously. Otherlocking mechanism can be used, such as the locking mechanism shownpreviously. The top portion 4151 of the locking mechanism is coupled toa first portion 4110 of a scissor arm of the clamping device. The bottomportion 4152 of the locking mechanism is coupled to a second portion4131 of the scissor arm. As shown, the locking mechanism is in adisengaged state, e.g., the top portion 4151 is loose from the bottomportion 4152. Thus, the pulling element is free to move with respect tothe pivot point 4131, e.g., to the body of the clamping device.

Due to the unlocked status of the locking mechanism, a hoist coupled tothe pulling element can lift the clamping device with the jaws clampedon object 4120. The clamping device can be brought down, for example, bylowering the hoist. Without touching the ground, the clamping device andthe object move as a unit, through the action of the hoist.

In FIG. 41B, the hoist can bring the clamping device, together with theclamped object, to a destination. The hoist can be lowered to place theobject on the ground.

The hoist can lower further, after the object has contacted the ground.Since the object has contacted the ground, lowering the hoist does notmove down the body of the clamping device. Instead, lowering the hoistcan move the pulling element down. The first portion 4110 of the scissorarm can move down with respect to the second portion 4131 of the scissorarm. The movement of the first portion 4110 can move the first portion4151 of the locking mechanism down, until the rod contact the matinghook receptacle. Since the locking mechanism is in unlocked state,lowering the pulling element can separate the jaws to release theclamping action on the object. Further, the hook end of the hook rod canenter the hook end of the hook receptacle.

In FIG. 41C, the hoist can lower further, after the hook end of the hookrod has contacted the bottom surface of the hook receptacle. The pullingelement is further lowered down, bringing the annular element assembly(the first annular element 4171 and the second annular element 4176,which is coupled as a unit) down with respect to the hook rod, until theprotruded pin in the rod contacts the slanting surface of the top (orsecond) annular element. The rod can rotate 45 degrees, partiallysecuring the hook end of the hook rod with the hook end of the hookreceptacle.

In FIG. 41D, the hoist can lift up. The first portion 4110 of thescissor arm can move up with respect to the second portion 4131 of thescissor arm. The movement of the first portion 4110 can move the annularelement assembly up, until the protruded pin in the rod contacts theslanting surface of the bottom (or first) annular element. The rod canrotate another angle such as 45 degrees. The rod can thus rotate acomplete angle of 90 degrees, which can switch the unlocked status tothe locked status, since the hook end of the rod is now fullyconstrained by the hook end of the hook receptacle after a 90 degreerotation.

The hoist can further lift up and move to a new object for pick up.Since the locking mechanism is locked, the jaws remain separated forease of accepting the object.

Thus, by bring down and then bring up the pulling element, the lockingmechanism changes state from an unlocked state to a lock state. Incombination with the process of changing the state from a locked stateto an unlock state, an operator can toggle the locking mechanism betweenlocked and unlocked states by bringing down followed by bringing up thepulling element or by the hoist coupled to the pulling element. Therecan be pauses between the step of bringing down and the step of bringingup.

FIGS. 42A-42C illustrate flow charts for operating a locking mechanismaccording to some embodiments. In FIG. 42A, operation 4200 togglesbetween a movable status and an unmovable status for a component of aclamping mechanism of a clamping device. The toggling process isactivated when at least one of the jaws of the clamping device is in avicinity of an opening distance from the other jaw. In the movablestatus, the component is configured to allow jaws of the clamping deviceto be movable toward each other to clamp on an object. In the unmovablestatus, the component is configured to have the jaws remaining opened.

In FIG. 42B, operation 4220 moves a component of a clamping mechanism ofa clamping device downward. When the component reaches a position, atoggling mechanism is activated to toggle between a movable status andan unmovable status for at least a jaw of the clamping device. In themovable status, the jaw is configured to be movably reachable toward anobject disposed between the jaw and another jaw of the clamping device.In the unmovable status, the jaws are configured to remain opened.

In FIG. 42C, operation 4240 moves a component of a clamping mechanism ofa clamping device downward to toggle at least a jaw of the clampingdevice between movably reachable toward an object disposed between thejaw and another jaw of the clamping device for clamping on the objectand remaining opened without clamping on the object.

FIGS. 43A-43B illustrate flow charts for operating a locking mechanismaccording to some embodiments. In FIG. 43A, operation 4300 moves a hoistcoupled to a clamping device downward to contact a surface. The clampingdevice clamps on an object.

Operation 4310 continues moving the hoist downward to open the jaws toreach an opening distance. When the jaws reach the opening distance, alocking mechanism of the clamping device is toggled from a movable to anunmovable status. In the movable status, the jaws of the clamping deviceare movable toward each other to clamp on the object. In the unmovablestatus, the jaws remain opened without clamping on the object. Operation4320 moves the hoist upward with the jaws opened and not clamping on theobject.

In FIG. 43B, operation 4340 moves a hoist coupled to a clamping devicedownward to contact an object. The jaws of the clamping device clampsare separated at a distance larger than a dimension of the object.Operation 4350 continues moving the hoist downward to toggle a lockingmechanism of the clamping device from an unmovable to a movable status.In the movable status, the jaws of the clamping device are movabletoward each other to clamp on the object. In the unmovable status, thejaws are opened without clamping on the object. Operation 4360 moves thehoist upward so that the jaws clamp on the object.

In some embodiments, the present invention discloses an automaticlocking mechanism for a clamping device, with the clamping device usinga clamping mechanism to clamping on an object. The automatic lockingmechanism can activate and deactivate, e.g., toggling clamping mechanismbetween an operational state, in which the clamping mechanism isoperational, and an inoperational state, in which the clamping mechanismis disable.

The automatic locking mechanism can include three elements, which caninclude a first element which can be fixedly coupled to a firstcomponent of the clamping device, a second element which can be fixedlycoupled to a second component of the clamping device, and a thirdelement movably but not separably coupled to the first element. Thefirst and second components can be movable components of the clampingmechanism, such as two components of a linkage that couples a pullingelement of the clamping device to the jaws of the clamping device. Whenthe linkage is movable, e.g., the first component is movable relative tothe second component, the linkage is enable, e.g., the jaws follow themovements of the pulling element. For example, when the pulling elementis lifted up, such as by a hoist coupled to the pulling element, thejaws can move toward each other, for clamping on an object.

The automatic locking mechanism can activate the linkage of the clampingmechanism, by allowing the first and second components movable relativeto each other. The automatic locking mechanism can deactivate thelinkage of the clamping mechanism, by coupling the first and secondcomponents together, such as securing the first component with thesecond component, with an optional backlash distance of movementsbetween the first and second components.

The activation and deactivation of the linkage can be accomplished bytoggling the automatic locking mechanism between a couplingconfiguration, in which the automatic locking mechanism causes the firstcomponent to be coupled to and not separatable from, the secondcomponent, and a separatable configuration, in which the automaticlocking mechanism causes the first component to be separatable from thesecond component.

The first element can include a toggle element, which can function totoggle the automatic locking mechanism between the couplingconfiguration and a separatable configuration. The toggle element caninclude slanting surfaces for converting vertical movements or forces toa rotational movement or force. The vertical movements or forces can beprovided by the clamping device, for example, by an operator operating ahoist coupled to the clamping device. A downward movement or force canbe accomplished by the hoist lowering the clamping device on an object,including actions of the clamping device contacting the object. Anupward movement or force can be accomplished by the hoist raising theclamping device.

The downward and upward movements or forces can be used by the toggleelement to rotatably activate and deactivate a latching element, whichcan deactivate and activate, respectively, the locking mechanism. Thelatching element can include the third element, which can be coupled orseparated from the second element of the locking mechanism, by therotational movements.

The toggle element can include one or more annular elements, having twosets of teeth, which can be configured to face each other, or to faceaway from each other. Each tooth can include a valley area, a slantingsurface rising from the valley area, and an abrupt surface going downtoward a valley area of an adjacent tooth. The slanting surface and theabrupt surface can join at a peak of the tooth.

Each set of teeth can be arranged around the annular element, such ascyclically arranged. For example, there can be 4 teeth for the first setof teeth surrounding a base of the annular element. The second set ofteeth can also include 4 teeth surrounding a base of the same annularelement, with the first and second sets of teeth are configured to faceaway from each other. Alternatively, the second set of teeth can alsoinclude 4 teeth surrounding a base of another annular element. The twoannular elements can be spaced apart, so that the two sets of teeth arefacing each other.

The first and second sets of teeth can be configured so that a valleyarea of a tooth in the first set of teeth is aligned with a slantingsurface of another tooth in the second set of teeth. The alignment canbe along an axis of rotation of the annular element. The first andsecond sets of teeth can be configured so that a valley area of a toothin the second set of teeth is aligned with a slanting surface of anothertooth in a first set of teeth. The alignment can be along an axis ofrotation of the annular element.

Thus, the valley area of each tooth can be facing the slanting surfaceof another tooth (in the case of two annular elements, spaced apart withthe two sets of teeth facing each other), or the valley area can befacing away from the slanting surface of another tooth (in the case ofonly one annular element having two sets of teeth facing in oppositedirections).

The second element can include a portion of the latch element, e.g., onecomponent of the latch element that can be latched to or released fromanother component of the latch element. The portion of the latch elementcan include a receptacle element, which has a hookable feature, such astwo parallel hooks facing each other and disposed in two sides of thereceptacle element. The hookable feature, e.g., the parallel hooks, canbe configured to be coupled to another component of the latch element,such as the third element of the automatic locking mechanism.

The third element can include the other portion of the latch element,the component of the latch element that can be configured to be latchedto or released from the receptacle element, e.g., the parallel hooks.The third element can include a rod, with a hook end at or near an endof the rod for latching to the second element, e.g., to the receptacleor the parallel hooks. For example, the hook end can include anelongated end portion disposed perpendicular to the axis of the rod. Theelongated end portion can have an ellipse or rectangular shape, e.g.,having a long side and a short side perpendicular to the rod. The hookend can be configured to toggle to with the receptacle, e.g., with theparallel hooks. The hook end can be toggled between the couplingconfiguration and the separatable configuration.

In the coupling configuration, the hook end is coupled to the receptacleso that the long side of the hook end is perpendicular to the parallelhooks, thus the rod is coupled to the receptacle, and cannot beseparated from the receptacle.

In the separatable configuration, the hook end faces the receptacle insuch a way so that the long side of the hook end is parallel to theparallel hooks, thus the hook end can be removed from the parallelhooks, e.g., the rod can be separated from the receptacle.

The third element can be disposed in the annular elements. For example,the third element can have a rod shape, such as a rod with a hook end.The rod can be inserted in the hollow portions of the annular elements.For example, in the case of two annular elements spaced from each other,the annular elements can be concentric, with the rod also concentricwith the annular elements, e.g., the axes of the rod and the annularelements are the same axes. In the case of one annular element, the rodand the annular element can be concentric.

The rod can have one or more protruded elements, such as one or morepins passing through the rod. The pins can be configured to interfacewith the slanting surfaces of the teeth, such as moving on the slantingsurface. The pins can have a length of the same size as the width of theslanting surface. Since the pins pass through the rod, such as passingthrough a center of the rod, the pins can protruded at both sides of therod. The teeth thus can be configured so that both sides of the pins,e.g., two portions of the pins that protruded from two sides of the rod,rest on two slanting surfaces of two opposite teeth, e.g., two teethacross the axis of the annular elements.

The pins can interface with the slanting surfaces of the first andsecond sets of teeth in such as way so that under a force causing thepins to contact a slanting surface, e.g., a slanting surface of a toothof the first or second set of teeth, the pins move along the slantingsurface to rest at the valley area at the bottom of the slantingsurface. The movement of the pins along the slanting surface can causethe rod to rotate an angle, such as between 40 and 50 degrees, such as45 degrees.

The force can be a vertical force, such as a downward force or an upwardforce. A combination of a downward and an upward forces can cause thepins to first contact a slanting surface of a tooth in a first set ofteeth, followed by contacting a slanting surface of another tooth in asecond set of teeth. The combination can cause the rod to rotate twice,forming a rotation of about 90 degrees, and thus toggling the hook endbetween the separatable configuration and the coupling configurationwith the hookable feature.

In some embodiments, the hook end can have a contact point with minimumarea, such as a sharp point, or a round point at a center end of therod. Thus the rod can rotate on the contact point, for example, thatcontacts a surface of the receptacle. The rod can be perpendicular tothe receptacle. The rod can be separated from the receptacle, and thenbrought in to contact a surface of the receptacle, such as a contactbetween the parallel hooks. The rod can then be rotate, on the minimumarea contact point, to toggle between the coupling configuration and theseparatable configuration. The rotation of the rod on the minimum areacontact point can have reduced friction, due to the minimum contactarea.

In some embodiments, the automatic locking mechanism can include asleeve for housing the annular elements. For example, the annularelements can include two annular spaced apart, and disposed in a sleeve.The sleeve can serve to keep the two annular elements at a fixedseparation. The annular elements can be fixed to the sleeve, forexample, by using pins, or screws to secure the annular elements withthe sleeve.

The sleeve can include a support feature, such as a step in the innersurface of the sleeve. The support feature can be configured to supportone annular element, such as to prevent the annular elements from movingin one direction, such as the downward direction. The support featurecan serve to balance a force acting on the annular elements by the rod.Since the rod can exert a large force downward on the annular element,as compared to a smaller force upward, the support feature can assist inhelping the annular element against the downward force.

In the case of two annular elements facing each other and spaced apartfrom each other, the support feature can support one annular element,such as the bottom annular element, e.g., the annular element closer tothe receptacle. In the case of one annular element having two sets ofteeth facing in opposite directions, the support feature can support theannular element. There can be two annular elements that are touchingeach other, instead of one annular element. The support feature cansupport the bottom annular element.

In some embodiments, the clamping device can have a support feature in ahousing of the sleeve. For example, the sleeve can be coupled to thefirst component of the clamping device. The first component can have ahousing, such as a recess, to house the sleeve. Alternatively, thesleeve can be housed in a housing, and the housing can be coupled to thefirst component. The housing can have a support feature to support thesleeve in a downward direction, such as a step in an inner surface ofthe housing on which the sleeve is rested, in order to support thesleeve and to prevent the sleeve from moving downward, e.g., toward thereceptacle.

In some embodiments, the clamping device can have a support feature in ahousing of the annular element. For example, the annular element can beone piece annular element or two piece annular elements that are coupledtogether. The annular element can be coupled to the first component ofthe clamping device, without a sleeve. The first component can have ahousing, such as a recess, to house the annular element. Alternatively,the annular element can be housed in a housing, and the housing can becoupled to the first component. The housing can have a support featureto support the annular element in a downward direction, such as a stepin an inner surface of the housing on which the annular element isrested, in order to support the annular element and to prevent theannular element from moving downward, e.g., toward the receptacle.

In some embodiments, the slanting surfaces of the teeth in the two setsof teeth can be helical curves, such as sections of helical curves,around the annular elements. A tooth can have a helical curve, risingfrom a valley area, and stopping at a peak of the tooth. The helicalcurve can have tangent lines forming a constant angle, for example, withthe axis of the annular element. The tangent line of the slantingsurface, e.g., of the helical curve, can make an angle between 40 and 50degrees, or 35 and 55 degrees.

In some embodiments, in the case of two annular elements having the twosets of teeth facing each other with a protruded pin disposed inbetween, the spacing of the two sets of teeth can be configured to havea minimum clearance distance, e.g., the clearance between the twoopposite teeth (in two sets of teeth) for the protruded pin to passthrough.

In the case of one annular element having the two sets of teeth facingin opposite directions, with two protruded pins sandwiching the two setsof teeth, the spacing of the two protruded pins can be configured tohave a minimum clearance distance, e.g., when a protruded pin movesalong the slanting surface of a tooth, the clearance on an oppositetooth for an opposite protruded pin to pass through the opposite tooth.

In some embodiments, a tooth of the two sets of teeth is chamfered orrounded. The chamfered or rounded tooth can provide a smaller clearancedistance, either between two annular elements sandwiching a protrudedpin, or between two protruded pins sandwiching an annular element. Thechamfered plane of one tooth can be parallel to the tangent of theopposite tooth to obtain the minimum clearance distance.

In some embodiments, the abrupt surface can be formed or chamfered toform an angle greater than zero with the axis of rotation.

In some embodiments, the automatic locking mechanism can be used in aclamping device using a half scissor mechanism with at least astationary jaw coupled to a body, and at least a movable jaw coupled toa scissor arm. A first part of the automatic locking mechanism can becoupled to a first arm of the scissor arm. A second part of theautomatic locking mechanism can be coupled to the body or to a secondarm of the scissor arm.

The automatic locking mechanism can be used in a clamping device using ascissor mechanism comprising two arm assemblies for moving two oppositejaws. A first part of the automatic locking mechanism can be coupled tothe slanting surface element or to a first arm of an arm assembly of thetwo arm assemblies. A second part of the automatic locking mechanism canbe coupled to a second arm of the arm assembly of the two arm assembliesor to a third arm of another arm assembly of the two arm assemblies.

The automatic locking mechanism can be used in a clamping device using ascissor mechanism comprising two arm assemblies for moving two oppositejaws. A first part of the automatic locking mechanism can be coupled toa first arm of an arm assembly of the two arm assemblies. A second partof the automatic locking mechanism can be coupled to a second arm of thearm assembly of the two arm assemblies or to a third arm of another armassembly of the two arm assemblies.

The automatic locking mechanism can be used in a clamping device havinga puling element having a roller to roll on a slanting surface elementto move a movable jaw against a stationary jaw. A first part of theautomatic locking mechanism can be coupled to the pulling element or tothe roller. A second part of the automatic locking mechanism can becoupled to a body of the clamping device.

In some embodiments, the frit element of the automatic locking mechanismcan include two annular elements or one annular element. In the case oftwo annular elements, the two annular elements each can have a set ofteeth arranged on a circumference of the annular element. The twoannular elements can be configured to be spaced apart, with the two setsof teeth facing each other. Alternatively, the two annular elements canbe coupled together, with the two sets of teeth facing oppositedirections.

In the case of one annular element, the annular element can have twosets of teeth arranged on one or two circumferences of the annularelement. The two sets of teeth can be configured to face oppositedirections.

For the configurations in which the two sets of teeth face each other,there can be a protruded pin disposed between the two sets of teeth. Theprotruded pin can be coupled to a rod.

For the configurations in which the two sets of teeth face in oppositedirections, there can be two protruded pins sandwiching the two sets ofteeth. The protruded pins can be coupled to a rod.

FIG. 44 illustrates a clamping device according to some embodiments. Theclamping device 4400 can use a half scissor mechanism, e.g., one jaw isfixed, and the opposite jaw is coupled by a scissor mechanism to apulling element. For example, a half scissor mechanism 4430 can couple amovable jaw 4441 to move against a stationary jaw 4461.

The clamping device can include multiple half scissor mechanisms 4430and 4430*, with each half scissor mechanism coupled to a movable jawopposite a stationary jaw. Optional elongated jaw plates 4440 and 4460can be coupled to multiple jaws at a same side, such as jaw plate 4440is coupled to the moving jaws 4441 and 4442.

The stationary jaws, such as jaw 4461, can be fixed coupled to a body4405 of the clamping device. The half scissor mechanism can include apivot point 4431, also fixedly coupled to the body 4405. A jaw armcoupled to the pivot point can be coupled to the movable jaw 4441. Anactivation arm coupled to the pivot point can include a scissor joint.Thus, when the activation arm is pulled up, the scissor joint isactivated. Due to the pivot point, the jaw arm is moved when theactivation arm is moved, which can move the jaw 4431 toward the oppositejaw 4461.

A connecting bar 4411 can be connected to ends of the activation arms ofthe multiple half scissor mechanisms 4430 and 4430*, for example, toactuating all the half scissor mechanisms together. The scissormechanism 4430 can include multiple guides 4412 to guide the connectingbar 4411 into proper movements for actuating the half scissormechanisms. A pulling element 4410 can be coupled to the connecting bar4411. When the pulling element is pulled up, the connecting bar alsomoves up, pulling on the activation arms of the half scissor mechanisms.Through the pivot points, the movable jaws move toward the oppositejaws, pressing the movable jaw plate 4440 toward the stationary jawplate 4460.

Thus the clamping device can have a linkage mechanism, linking thepulling element 4410 with the jaw plate 4440. Pulling on the pullingelement can move the movable jaw plate toward the stationary oppositejaw plate. Releasing the pull on the pulling element can move themovable jaw plate in the opposite direction, for example, due togravitation. The linkage mechanism can include the connecting bar,coupled to the activation arms, coupled to the pivot points, and coupledto the jaw arms.

A locking mechanism 4450 can be included, for hand-free actuating theclamping device using the multiple half scissor mechanisms. The lockingmechanism can allow or prevent the engagement of the half scissormechanisms, e.g., allowing or prevent the linkage mechanism between thepulling element and the jaw plate. When the locking mechanism isactivated or locked, the linkage mechanism is prevented or disable,meaning pulling on the pulling element does not move the jaw plate. Whenthe locking mechanism is deactivated or unlocked, the linkage mechanismis allowed or enable, meaning pulling on the pulling element move thejaw plate toward the opposite jaw plate.

The locking mechanism can include a top part 4451, which can be lockedto or release from the bottom part 4452. The top part 4451 can besecured to the pulling element 4410 through the connecting bar 4411,e.g., the top part can be secured to the connecting bar, and since theconnecting bar is secured to the pulling element, the top part can moveas a unit together with the pulling element. The bottom part 4452 can besecured to the body 4405 of the clamping device, such as to a connectingbar 4406 coupling two portions of the body. The top part can include amovable rod having an elongated head, which can be locked to or releasedfrom a mated hook in the bottom part.

The automatic locking mechanism can be coupled to different portions ofthe clamping device, such as automatic locking mechanism 4450A coupledto the connecting bar 4411 and the body 4405 of one side of the scissorarm, or automatic locking mechanism 4450B coupled to two portions 4430of one side of the scissor arm.

The top part 4451 can include a rod 4453 having an elongated head 4455.The elongated head can have one side longer than a side perpendicular toit, such as an ellipse shape or a rectangular shape. If the elongatedhead has the longer side disposed within the hook 4481 of the bottompart 4452, the rod can be secured to the hook, forming a lock status inwhich the top part is secured to the bottom part. If the elongated headhas the shorter side disposed within the hook 4481 of the bottom part4452, the rod can be movable out of the hook, forming an unlock statusin which the top part can be moved from the bottom part.

The top part can include annular elements 4482 and 4486 having slantingsurfaces, which can be mated with protruded pin on the rod. The annularelements and the protruded pin can be configured so that when the rod ispushed into and released out of the annular elements, the rod can rotatean angle such as 90 degrees, to toggle between longer side and shorterside, e.g., toggle between a lock status and an unlock status.

When the locking mechanism is engaged, meaning the top part is lockedinto the bottom part, the pulling element is fixedly coupled to the bodyof the clamping device. Thus the pulling element cannot move to activatethe half scissor mechanisms, and the movable jaw plate is stationarywhen pulling on or lowering the pulling element.

When the locking mechanism is disengaged, meaning the top part isunlocked from the bottom part, the pulling element is freely to movewith respect to the body of the clamping device. Thus the pullingelement can move to activate the half scissor mechanisms, and themovable jaw plate can move toward or away from the opposite jaw platewhen pulling on or lowering the pulling element, respectively.

The clamping device can have other options, such as a contact mechanism4470 to visually detecting the object, for example, when the clampingdevice moves toward the object for clamping. The contact mechanism canbe particular useful for transparent objects, such as glass plates,which can be difficult for the operator to see the edge of the plates.The clamping device can include roller feet 4471 for rolling the scissorclamp, for example, for moving between places on the ground. Theclamping device can include a guiding mechanism 4472 for guiding objectstoward the space between the stationary jaw and the movable jaw.

FIGS. 45A-45B illustrate processes for operating a clamping deviceaccording to some embodiments. The clamping device 4500 can include alocking mechanism that can automatically lock and release the jaws.

FIGS. 45A(a)-45A(d) show a process for an empty clamping device to pickan object. In FIG. 45A(a), the locking mechanism is engaged 4550A,securing the opening of the jaws, e.g., the jaws are separated at afixed distance, regardless of movements of the clamping device. Thus,when the clamping device is lifted up 4510 and moved to approaching theobject, the distance between the jaws is unchanged.

In FIG. 45A(b), the clamping device is moved to be positioned on theobject. Since the locking mechanism is engaged, the space between thejaws is large to accommodate the object. The clamping device then can belowered so that the object is disposed between the jaws.

The clamping device is lowered 4511 enough to touch the object. Apulling element can then be further lowered, with respect to the body ofthe clamping device, to partially unlock the locking mechanism. Forexample, a top part of the locking mechanism can move down (since thetop part is secured to the pulling element), so that a rod is moved up.Annular elements with slanting surfaces in the top part can partialrotate the rod, for example, through protruded pins coupled to the rod.

In FIG. 45A(c), the pulling element is lifted up 4512. At the beginning,the top part of the locking mechanism can move up (since the top part issecured to the pulling element), so that the rod is moved down. Annularelements with slanting surfaces in the top part can partial rotate therod again through protruded pins coupled to the rod. The completerotation can be 90 degrees, thus can release the rod from a hook in abottom part of the locking mechanism.

The pulling element is then further lifted up. Since the lockingmechanism is unlocked, the linkage mechanism is activated, and the jawsmove toward each other for clamping 4522 on the object.

In FIG. 45A(d), the lifting of the pulling element will also lift theobject after the jaws clamp on the object. The clamping device can liftand move the clamped object to a destination.

FIGS. 45B(a)-45B(d) show a process for a clamping device clamping on anobject to release the object at a destination.

In FIG. 45B(a), the locking mechanism is disengaged 4550B, allowing thejaws to move when the clamping device is lifted up. Thus, when theclamping device is lifted up 4510 and moved, the jaws clamp on theobject to secure the object to the clamping device.

In FIG. 45B(b), the clamping device is moved to a destination fordropping the object. The clamping device can be lowered 4511 until theobject touches the ground. The pulling element can be further loweredwhile the body of the clamping device is stationary by contacting theobject. The lowering of the pulling element can enlarge the distancebetween the jaws, e.g., increasing the separation between the jaws.

When the jaws are separated at a predetermined distance, such as amaximum distance, the top part of the locking mechanism can contact thebottom part of the locking mechanism, such as the elongated head of therod can contact the hook of the bottom part. Since the locking mechanismis disable, the shorter side of the elongated head is facing the hook,thus the elongated head can enter the hook without any obstacle.

The lowering of the pulling element can lower the top part, thus movingthe rod upward. The contact of the protruded pins with the slantingsurfaces of the annular elements can partially rotate the rod.

In FIG. 45B(c), the pulling element is lifted up 4512. At the beginning,the top part of the locking mechanism can move up (since the top part issecured to the pulling element), so that the rod is moved down. Thecontact of the protruded pins with the slanting surfaces of the annularelements can partially rotate the rod again. The complete rotation canbe 90 degrees, thus can secure the rod to the hook in a bottom part ofthe locking mechanism, e.g., the rod is rotated so that the longer sidemates with the hook to secure the rod with the hook.

The pulling element is then further lifted up. Since the lockingmechanism is locked, the linkage mechanism is deactivated, and the jawsare stationary, e.g., fixed in the separated state.

In FIG. 45B(d), the clamping device is lifted up. Since the jaws areseparated, the object is left at the destination, and only the emptyclamping device is moved. The clamping device is ready to move forapproaching a new object for pick up.

FIG. 46 illustrates a clamping device according to some embodiments. Theclamping device 4600 can use a slanting interface mechanism, e.g., apulling element having a slanting surface can be coupled to scissor armsto move clamping jaws. For example, a triangle pulling element canemploy the slanting sides to extend or retract two scissor arms, whichcan pivot around a pivot point 4631 to move opposite jaws.

The clamping device can include elongated jaws 4640 and 4660. Theclamping device can include a pulling element 4610, which can activatescissor arms around a pivot point. Thus, when the pulling element ispulled up, the scissor arms can extend. Due to the pivot point, the jawarm can move when the scissor arms extend, which can move the jaws forclamping on an object.

Thus the clamping device can have a linkage mechanism, linking thepulling element 4610 with the jaws 4640 and 4660. Pulling on the pullingelement can move the jaws together. Releasing the pull on the pullingelement can separate the jaws, for example, due to gravitation.

A locking mechanism 4650 can be included, for hand-free actuating theclamping device. The locking mechanism can allow or prevent theengagement of the linkage mechanism between the pulling element and thejaws. When the locking mechanism is activated or locked, the linkagemechanism is prevented or disable, meaning pulling on the pullingelement does not move the jaws. When the locking mechanism isdeactivated or unlocked, the linkage mechanism is allowed or enable,meaning pulling on the pulling element move the jaws together.

The locking mechanism can include a top part 4651, which can be lockedto or release from the bottom part 4652. The top part 4651 can besecured to the pulling element 4610. The bottom part 4652 can be securedto the pivot point 4631. The top part can include a movable rod havingan elongated head, which can be locked to or released from a mated hookin the bottom part.

The top part 4651 can include a rod 4653 having an elongated head 4655.The top part can include annular elements having slanting surfaces,which can be mated with protruded pins on the rod. The annular elementsand the protruded pins can be configured so that when the rod is pushedinto and released out of the annular elements, the rod can rotate anangle such as 90 degrees, to toggle between longer side and shorterside, e.g., toggle between a lock status and an unlock status.

When the locking mechanism is engaged, meaning the top part is lockedinto the bottom part, the pulling element is fixedly coupled to the bodyof the clamping device. Thus the pulling element cannot move to activatethe linkage mechanism, and the jaws are stationary when pulling on orlowering the pulling element.

When the locking mechanism is disengaged, meaning the top part isunlocked from the bottom part, the pulling element is freely to move,e.g., separatable with respect to the body of the clamping device. Thusthe pulling element can move to activate the linkage mechanism, and thejaws can move toward or away from each other when pulling on or loweringthe pulling element, respectively.

The clamping device can have other options, such as a contact mechanism4670 to visually detecting the object, for example, when the clampingdevice moves toward the object for clamping. The contact mechanism canbe particular useful for transparent objects, such as glass plates,which can be difficult for the operator to see the edge of the plates.The clamping device can include roller feet 4671 for rolling the scissorclamp, for example, for moving between places on the ground. Theclamping device can include a guiding mechanism 4672 for guiding objectstoward the space between the stationary jaw and the movable jaw.

FIGS. 47A-47B illustrate processes for operating a clamping deviceaccording to some embodiments. The clamping device 4700 can include alocking mechanism that can automatically lock and release the jaws.

FIGS. 47A(a)-47A(d) show a process for an empty clamping device to pickan object. In FIG. 47A(a), the locking mechanism is engaged 4750A,securing the opening of the jaws. In FIG. 47A(b), the clamping device ismoved to place an object between the jaws. A pulling element can then befurther lowered, with respect to the body of the clamping device, topartially unlock the locking mechanism. For example, a rod in thelocking mechanism can partially rotate.

In FIG. 47A(c), the pulling element is lifted up, and can partial rotatethe rod again. The complete rotation can release the rod from a hook inthe locking mechanism. The pulling element is then further lifted up tomove the jaws for clamping on the object. In FIG. 47A(d), the lifting ofthe pulling element will also lift the object after the jaws clamp onthe object.

FIGS. 47B(a)-47B(d) show a process for a clamping device clamping on anobject to release the object at a destination.

In FIG. 47B(a), the locking mechanism is disengaged 4750B. In FIG.47B(b), the clamping device moves to a destination, and lowers theobject to the ground. The pulling element can be further lowered toincrease the separation between the jaws. The pulling element can belowered until the rod pressing on the hook, which can partially rotatethe rod.

In FIG. 47B(c), the pulling element is lifted up, and can partial rotatethe rod again. The complete rotation can lock the rod to the hook. InFIG. 47B(d), the pulling element is lifted up to move for approaching anew object for pick up.

FIGS. 48A-48B illustrate a clamping device according to someembodiments. The clamping device 4800 can use a scissor mechanism, e.g.,two jaws are coupled to a scissor mechanism to a pulling element. Forexample, a scissor mechanism 4830 can couple to jaws 4840 and 4860, sothat when a pulling element 4810 is pulled up or released, the jaws movetoward each other or away from each other, respectively.

The scissor mechanism can include a pivot point 4831, which is fixedlycoupled to the body of the clamping device. The scissor mechanism caninclude a pulling element arm, which is connected to the pullingelement, and a jaw arm, which is connected to the jaw, and rotatableover the pivot joint 4831.

Thus, when the pulling element is pulled up, the scissor mechanism isactivated. Due to the pivot point, the jaw arm is moved when the pullingelement arm is moved, which can move the jaws together or away from eachother.

Thus the clamping device can have a linkage mechanism, linking thepulling element 4810 with the jaws 4840 and 4860. Pulling on the pullingelement can move the jaws toward each other. Releasing the pull on thepulling element can move the jaws away from each other, for example, dueto gravitation. The linkage mechanism can include the pulling elementarms, coupled to the jaw arms through the pivot points.

A locking mechanism 4850 can be included, for hand-free actuating theclamping device using the scissor mechanism. The locking mechanism canallow or prevent the engagement of the scissor mechanism, e.g., allowingor prevent the linkage mechanism between the pulling element and thejaws. When the locking mechanism is activated or locked, the linkagemechanism is prevented or disable, meaning pulling on the pullingelement does not move the jaws. When the locking mechanism isdeactivated or unlocked, the linkage mechanism is allowed or enable,meaning pulling on the pulling element move the jaws away from eachother.

The locking mechanism can include a top part 4851, which can be lockedto or release from the bottom part 4852. The top part 4851 can besecured to a pulling element arm 4830A. The bottom part 4852 can besecured to a jaw arm 4830B. The top part can include a movable rodhaving an elongated head, which can be locked to or released from amated hook in the bottom part.

The top part 4851 can include a rod 4853 having an elongated head 4855.The elongated head can have one side longer than a side perpendicular toit, such as an ellipse shape or a rectangular shape. If the elongatedhead has the longer side disposed within the hook 4881 of the bottompart 4852, the rod can be secured to the hook, forming a lock status inwhich the top part is secured to the bottom part. If the elongated headhas the shorter side disposed within the hook 4881 of the bottom part4852, the rod can be movable out of the hook, forming an unlock statusin which the top part can be moved from the bottom part.

The top part can include annular elements 4882 and 4886 having slantingsurfaces, which can be mated with protruded pins on the rod. The annularelements and the protruded pins can be configured so that when the rodis pushed into and released out of the annular elements, the rod canrotate an angle such as 90 degrees, to toggle between longer side andshorter side, e.g., toggle between a lock status and an unlock status.

When the locking mechanism is engaged, meaning the top part is lockedinto the bottom part, the pulling element arm is fixedly coupled to thejaw arm. Thus the pulling element cannot move to activate the scissormechanism, and the jaws are stationary when pulling on or lowering thepulling element.

When the locking mechanism is disengaged, meaning the top part isunlocked from the bottom part, the pulling element is freely to move,e.g., separatable with respect to the body of the clamping device. Thusthe pulling element can move to activate the scissor mechanism, and themovable jaws can move toward or away from each other when pulling on orlowering the pulling element, respectively.

FIGS. 49A-49B illustrate processes for operating a clamping deviceaccording to some embodiments. The clamping device 4900 can include alocking mechanism that can automatically lock and release the jaws.

FIGS. 49A(a)-49A(d) show a process for an empty clamping device to pickan object. In FIG. 49A(a), the locking mechanism is engaged 4950A,securing the opening of the jaws. In FIG. 49A(b), the clamping device ismoved to place an object between the jaws. A pulling element can then befurther lowered, with respect to the body of the clamping device, topartially unlock the locking mechanism. For example, a rod in thelocking mechanism can partially rotate.

In FIG. 49A(c), the pulling element is lifted up, and can partial rotatethe rod again. The complete rotation can release the pin from a hook inthe locking mechanism. The pulling element is then further lifted up tomove the jaws for clamping on the object. In FIG. 49A(d), the lifting ofthe pulling element will also lift the object after the jaws clamp onthe object.

FIGS. 49B(a)-49B(d) show a process for a clamping device clamping on anobject to release the object at a destination.

In FIG. 49B(a), the locking mechanism is disengaged 4950B. In FIG.49B(b), the clamping device moves to a destination, and lowers theobject to the ground. The pulling element can be further lowered toincrease the separation between the jaws. The pulling element can belowered until the rod pressing on the hook, which can partially rotatethe rod.

In FIG. 49B(c), the pulling element is lifted up, and can partial rotatethe rod again. The complete rotation can lock the rod to the hook. InFIG. 49B(d), the pulling element is lifted up to move for approaching anew object for pick up.

FIGS. 50A-50B illustrate a clamping device according to someembodiments. The clamping device 5000 can use a slanting interfacemechanism, e.g., a pulling element having a roller for rolling on aslanting surface of a jaw support. For example, the pulling element canbe disposed between a jaw and a jaw support. When the pulling elementrolls of the slanting surface of the jaw support, the jaw can move awayfrom or toward the jaw support.

The clamping device 5000 can be configured for lifting heavy objects.The clamping device can include a first jaw 5060 coupled to a clamp bar5080. The clamping device can include a second jaw assembly, which canbe movably and lockably coupled to the clamp bar. The second jawassembly can include a second jaw 5041 disposed opposite the first jaw.The second jaw assembly can include a jaw support 5042, which can slidealong the clamp bar for movably coupled to the clamp bar. The second jawassembly can be lockable to the clamp bar. The second jaw assembly caninclude stretchable elements, such as springs, which can be coupled tothe second jaw and the jaw support, for pulling the second jaw towardthe jaw support. The stretchable elements can allow the second jaw tomove away from the jaw support, for a limited distance, such as adistance equal or smaller than a distance between the discrete lockinglocations of the discrete locking mechanism.

The clamping device can include a pulling element 5010, which can beconfigured to be pulled on for lifting the clamped object. The pullingelement can freely move in an up direction. The pulling element can beconfigured to exert a clamping force on the object when being pulled,for example, by rolling through roller 5035 on slanting surface 5070 ofthe jaw support.

A locking mechanism 5050 can be included, for hand-free actuating theslanting interface mechanism. The locking mechanism can allow or preventthe engagement of the linkage mechanism between the pulling element andthe jaw. When the locking mechanism is activated or locked, the linkagemechanism is prevented or disable, meaning pulling on the pullingelement does not move the pulling element. When the locking mechanism isdeactivated or unlocked, the linkage mechanism is allowed or enable,meaning pulling on the pulling element move the pulling element formoving the jaw toward the other jaw.

The locking mechanism can include a top part 5051, which can be lockedto or release from the bottom part 5052. The top part 5051 can besecured to the pulling element 5010. The bottom part 5052 can be securedto the clamp bar 5080. The top part can include a movable rod having anelongated head, which can be locked to or released from a mated hook inthe bottom part.

The automatic locking mechanism can be coupled to different portions ofthe clamping device, such as another automatic locking mechanism coupledto the roller 5035 and the jaw support body 5042.

The top part 5051 can include a rod 5053 having an elongated head 5055.The top part can include annular elements 5072 and 5076 having slantingsurfaces, which can be mated with protruded pins on the rod. The annularelements and the protruded pins can be configured so that when the rodis pushed into and released out of the annular elements, the rod canrotate an angle such as 90 degrees, to toggle between longer side andshorter side, e.g., toggle between a lock status and an unlock status.

When the locking mechanism is engaged, meaning the top part is lockedinto the bottom part, the pulling element is fixedly coupled to the bodyof the clamping device. Thus the pulling element cannot move to activatethe linkage mechanism, and the jaws are stationary when pulling on orlowering the pulling element.

When the locking mechanism is disengaged, meaning the top part isunlocked from the bottom part, the pulling element is separatable withrespect to the body of the clamping device. Thus the pulling element canmove to activate the linkage mechanism, and the jaws can move toward oraway from each other when pulling on or lowering the pulling element,respectively.

FIGS. 51A-51F illustrate another clamping device configuration accordingto some embodiments. The clamping device 5100 can use a slantinginterface mechanism, e.g., a pulling element 5110 having a roller forrolling on a slanting surface of a jaw support.

The clamping device can include a first jaw 5160 coupled to clamp bars5180. The clamping device can include a second jaw assembly, which canbe movably and lockably coupled to the clamp bar. The second jawassembly can include a second jaw 5141 disposed opposite the first jaw.The second jaw assembly can include a jaw support 5142, which can slidealong the clamp bars for movably coupled to the clamp bar. The secondjaw 5141 can be movable relative to the jaw support 5142, such as afunction of the pulling element positions.

A locking mechanism 5150 can be included, for hand-free actuating theslanting interface mechanism.

The locking mechanism can include a top part, which can be locked to orrelease from the bottom part. The bottom part can include a hookreceptacle 5181, which can be secured to a stationary portion of theclamping device, such as to the body of the clamping device, forexample, to the jaw support 5142.

The top part can include a shell 5185, which can be secured to a movableportion of clamping device, such as to the pulling element 5110. Anannular element 5170 can be disposed inside the shell 5185, and can besecured to the shell, for example, by a set of nuts and bolts 5170A. Theshell 5185 can have a support 5185A, such as a step, to support theannular element 5170, e.g., against a downward force acting on theannular element. The annular element 5170 can include teeth 5172 and5177, disposed on two opposite sides. A movable rod 5153 with protrudedpins can be disposed inside the annular element. The rod 5153 can havean elongated head 5155 for releasably mating with the hook receptacle5181.

FIGS. 52A-52B illustrate processes for operating a clamping deviceaccording to some embodiments. The clamping device 5200 can include alocking mechanism that can automatically lock and release the jaws.

FIGS. 52A(a)-52A(d) show a process for an empty clamping device to pickan object. In FIG. 52A(a), the locking mechanism is engaged 5250A,securing the opening of the jaws. In FIG. 52A(b), the clamping device ismoved to place an object between the jaws. A pulling element can then befurther lowered, with respect to the body of the clamping device, topartially unlock the locking mechanism. For example, a rod in thelocking mechanism can partially rotate.

In FIG. 52A(c), the pulling element is lifted up, and can partial rotatethe rod again. The complete rotation can release the rod from a hook inthe locking mechanism. The pulling element is then further lifted up tomove the jaws for clamping on the object. In FIG. 52A(d), the lifting ofthe pulling element will also lift the object after the jaws clamp onthe object.

FIGS. 52B(a)-52B(d) show a process for a clamping device clamping on anobject to release the object at a destination.

In FIG. 52B(a), the locking mechanism is disengaged 5250B. In FIG.52B(b), the clamping device moves to a destination, and lowers theobject to the ground. The pulling element can be further lowered toincrease the separation between the jaws. The pulling element can belowered until the rod pressing on the hook, which can partially rotatethe rod.

In FIG. 52B(c), the pulling element is lifted up, and can partial rotatethe rod again. The complete rotation can lock the rod to the hook. InFIG. 52B(d), the pulling element is lifted up to move for approaching anew object for pick up.

FIGS. 53A-53D illustrate a clamping device according to someembodiments. A clamping device can include a first jaw assembly and asecond jaw assembly disposed in substantially perpendicular with a clampbar. The clamp bar can include multiple bars, which can be coupled tothe first and second jaw assembly. The first jaw assembly can be fixedlycoupled to the clamp bar. The second jaw assembly can also be fixedlycoupled to the clamp bar. Alternatively, the second jaw assembly can bemovably coupled to the clamp bar, such as moving along the clamp bar,and then secured to the clamp bar, for example, by a locking mechanism.

The clamping device can include a rotatable element, which can becoupled to a jaw assembly. For example, the jaw assembly can include ajaw facing a jaw support. The rotatable element can be disposed betweenthe jaw and the jaw support, and can be rotatably coupled to a componentof the jaw assembly, such as to the jaw. A pulling element can becoupled to the rotatable element to rotate the rotatable element in onedirection. A return mechanism, such as a spiral spring assembly, can beused to rotate the rotatable element in an opposite direction.

An interface between the rotatable element and a component of the jawassembly, such as the jaw support can include a slanting surface, whichcan be configured so that when the rotatable element is rotated in thedirection caused by the pulling of the pulling element, the jaw ismoving away from the jaw support if there is no obstacle blocking themovement of the jaw. If an object is already present between the jaws ofthe clamping device, the slanting surface can convert the action ofpulling the pulling element to an action, e.g., a force, pushing on thejaw, to clamp on the object.

The slanting interface can include one or more spiral surfaces coupledto the rotatable element, and one or more rollers coupled to a componentof the jaw assembly, such as to the jaw support.

FIG. 53A shows a perspective view of the clamping device. A clampingdevice 5300 can include a first jaw 5360 which is coupled to a clamp bar5380. A rubber pad 5365 can be coupled to the first jaw to increasefriction with clamped objects. A jaw assembly including a second jaw5341 and a jaw support 5342 can be coupled to the clamp bar. A rubberpad 5345 can be coupled to the second jaw to increase friction withclamped objects.

A rotatable element 5330 can be disposed between the second jaw and thejaw support. The rotatable element can be rotatably coupled to thesecond jaw, and can have slanting interfaces with the jaw support. Therotatable element can have spiral surfaces, interfacing with rollers inthe jaw support. The rollers can roll on the spiral or helical surfacesof the rotatable element.

A pulling element 5343 can have one end fixedly coupled to the rotatableelement, and wrapped around the rotatable element. Thus, when thepulling element is pulled up, the rotatable element can rotate, whichcan rotate the spiral surfaces on the rollers, moving the rotatableelement relative to the jaw support. The other end of the pullingelement can include a coupled, such as a hook, for coupling with a hoistfor moving the clamping device.

The clamping device can include other components, such as an automaticlocking mechanism for enabling or disabling a linkage between thepulling element and the second jaw. For example, the automatic lockingmechanism can allow or prevent the rotatable element from rotating, thuspulling on the pulling element can rotate or non-rotate the rotatableelement.

FIG. 53B shows a cross section of a clamping device, which can include afirst jaw 5360 fixedly coupled to a clamp bar 5380, such as a single baror multiple connection bars. The first jaw can include a rubber pad 5365to increase a friction with objects to be clamped. In some embodiments,the first jaw can be removably coupled to the clamp bar, together with alocking mechanism for securing the first jaw to the clamp bar.Alternatively, the first jaw can be a part of a first jaw assembly,which can also include a first jaw support. The first jaw of the firstjaw support can be coupled to the clamp bar, such as fixedly coupled orremovably coupled with a locking mechanism.

The clamping device can include a second jaw assembly, which can bemovably and lockably coupled to the clamp bar. The second jaw assemblycan include a second jaw 5341 disposed opposite the first jaw. Thesecond jaw can include a rubber pad 5345 to increase a friction withobjects to be clamped. The second jaw assembly can include a jaw support5342, which can slide along the clamp bar for movably coupled to theclamp bar. As shown, the first jaw is fixedly coupled to the clamp bar,and the second jaw assembly is movably coupled to the clamp bar. Otherconfigurations can be used, such as the first jaw is movably coupled tothe clamp bar, and the second jaw assembly is fixedly coupled to theclamp bar. Alternatively, the first jaw and the second jaw assembly canboth be movably coupled to the clamp bar. A jaw or a jaw assembly, ifmovably coupled to the clamp bar, can include a locking mechanism forsecuring the jaw or the jaw assembly to the clamp bar.

There can be flexible couplings between the second jaw and the jawsupport. The flexible couplings can allow the second jaw to move inmultiple directions with respect to the jaw support, such as down andaway from the jaw support. The flexible couplings can include springshaving two ends fixedly coupled to the second jaw 5341 and the jawsupport 5342. The springs can bend and flex, allowing the second jaw tomove relative to the jaw support.

The clamping device can include a pulling element 5343, which can beconfigured to be pulled on for lifting the clamped object. The pullingelement can be coupled to a rotatable element 5330, which is disposedbetween the second jaw and the jaw support. The pulling element can alsobe disposed between the clamp bar, e.g., between the multiple connectionbars. The pulling element can freely move in an up direction. In thedown direction, a spring set can be used to pull the pulling elementtoward the rotatable element.

The rotatable element can be configured to exert a clamping force on theobject when rotating, for example, through a slanting surface on therotatable element. For example, the jaw support can include a set ofrollers, which can provide rolling friction with the slanting surface ofthe rotatable element. Thus there can be minimum friction when therotatable element is rotating, pushing the second jaw away from the jawsupport due to the slanting surface.

The clamping device can include a locking mechanism 5350A, which can becoupled to either the clamp bar or to the second jaw assembly to preventthe rotatable element from being rotated. The rotatable element can beconstrained from rotating, thus the second locking mechanism, whenengaged, when secure the rotatable element to the second jaw. Therotatable element can be locked to a position of maximum jaw opening,which can provide that the second jaw is closest to the jaw support.

In operation, the locking mechanism, e.g., the locking mechanism thatlocks the second jaw assembly to the clamp bar, can be unlocked, forexample, by pulling back a second mated component to disengage thesecond mated component 5372 from a first mated component. This willrelease the second jaw assembly from the clamp bar, and thus the secondjaw assembly can slide along the clamp bar so that the distance betweenthe two jaws can be large enough to accommodate the object.

After putting the object within the first and second jaw, the lockingmechanism can be engaged, e.g., the second mated component can be pushedup to engage with the first mated component, locking the second jawassembly to the clamp bar. If the locking mechanism is a discretelocking mechanism, there can be gaps between the object and the jaws.

This process can be optional. In some embodiments, the second jawassembly can be secured to the clamp bar, and the clamping device can beconfigured to handle objects having a range of thicknesses, determinedby the movements of the second jaw.

Next, the locking mechanism 5350A can be unlocked, so the pullingelement can be pulled up. Due to the rollers, the rotatable element caneasily rotate against the jaw support. The second jaw can move away fromthe jaw support, until the second jaw is in contact with the object. Ifthere is a gap between the object and the first jaw, the second jaw cankeep moving to narrow that gap. The second jaw then continue to moveuntil the first and second jaws all contact the object.

FIGS. 53C-53D show internal views of the rotatable clamping device. Aclamping device can include a first jaw 5360 facing a second jaw 5341. Arotatable element 5330 can be rotatably coupled to the second jaw, forexample, through ball bearings. A pulling element 5343 can be coupled tothe rotatable element, and can rotate the rotatable element, whenpulled, in one direction, such as counterclockwise as shown. Springassembly 5335 can be coupled between the rotatable element and thesecond jaw to rotate the rotatable element in an opposite direction, forexample, when the pulling element is not pulled or released.

The rotatable element can include slanting surface, such as spiral orhelical surfaces 5371, which can change a distance between the rotatableelement and a jaw support (not shown). An automatic locking mechanism5350B or 5350C can be coupled to the rotatable element at differentlocations. The automatic locking mechanism can be fixedly coupled to thesecond jaw, and can function to allow or to prevent the rotatableelement from rotating.

A pulling element 5343 can be coupled to a rotatable element 5330. Forexample, one end of the pulling element can be fixedly coupled to therotatable element. Thus, when the pulling element is pulled up, therotatable element can rotate, such as in a clockwise direction as shown.A spring assembly 5335 can be used to rotate the rotatable element in anopposite direction, when the pulling element is relaxed.

A limiter can be used to limit the amount of rotation. For example, asshown, the rotatable element can rotate at most about 180 degrees.Rollers can be included to reduce friction between the rotatable elementand a jaw support (not shown). The rotatable element can includeslanting surface, such as spiral or helical surfaces 5371. There can be2 spiral or helical surfaces, thus the rotatable element can obtain amaximum separation with the jaw support when rotating about 180 degrees.

FIGS. 54A-54B illustrate locking mechanisms for a clamping deviceaccording to some embodiments. A clamping device can use a slantinginterface mechanism, such as a rotatable element having spiral orhelical surfaces coupling with rollers of a jaw support. For example,the rotatable element can be disposed between a jaw and a jaw support.When the rotatable element rotates, the rollers can roll on the spiralor helical surfaces of the rotatable element to push the jaw away fromor pull the jaw toward the jaw support.

A pulling element can be coupled to the rotatable element for rotatingthe rotatable element. When the pulling element is pulled up, therotatable element can rotate, and the second jaw can move toward thefirst jaw for clamping on an object. When the pulling element isreleased, e.g., not pulling up, a return mechanism such as a spiralspring can rotate the rotatable element in an opposite direction, whichcan move the second jaw away from the first jaw.

A locking mechanism can be included, for hand-free actuating theslanting interface mechanism. The locking mechanism can allow or preventthe rotation of the rotatable element.

FIGS. 54A(a) and 54A(b) show locked and unlocked states for a lockingmechanism of a clamping device 5400 employing a rotatable mechanism. Atop part 5451A of a locking mechanism 5450A is coupled to the pullingelement, such as coupled to a flexible element 5443 (e.g., a rope, abelt, or a chain) which is configured to rotate a rotatable element 5430(e.g., a disk or a round plate). A bottom part 5452A of the lockingmechanism 5450A is coupled to a body of the clamping device.

When the top part is locked with the bottom part (FIG. 54A(a)), thepulling element 5443 is coupled with the body of the clamping device.Thus the pulling element cannot move up freely, e.g., the pullingelement can be fixedly coupled to the body (except maybe a smallbacklash distance caused by the operation of the locking mechanism). Thefixed pulling element can stop the rotatable element from rotating, andthe jaws are fixed in position, e.g., the jaws are not movable towardeach other for clamping.

When the top part is unlocked with the bottom part (FIG. 54A(b)), thepulling element 5443 is free to move with respect to the body of theclamping device. Thus the top part can move away from the bottom part.The rotatable element can rotate in one direction when the pullingelement is pulled up. The rotation of the rotatable element in thisdirection can cause the jaws to move toward each other, for clamping onan object. The rotatable element can rotate in an opposite directionwhen the pulling element is released, due to the presence of a springconfiguration 5435. The rotation of the rotatable element in thisopposite direction can cause the jaws to move away from each other, forreleasing the object.

The locking mechanism can be automatically toggled due to a set ofvertical movements, which can include a lowering movement of the pullingelement, followed by a raising movement of the pulling element. The setof vertical movements can rotate a rod having a hook end, which can betoggled between hooked and unhooked to a mating hook receptacle.

FIGS. 54B(a) and 54A(b) show locked and unlocked states for anotherlocking mechanism of a clamping device 5401 employing a rotatablemechanism. A top part 5451B of a locking mechanism 5450B is coupled to abody of the clamping device. A bottom part 5452B of the lockingmechanism 5450B is coupled to the rotatable element 5430 (e.g., a diskor a round plate).

When the top part is locked with the bottom part (FIG. 54B(a)), therotatable element 5430 is coupled with the body of the clamping device.Thus the rotatable element cannot rotate freely, e.g., the rotatableelement can be fixedly coupled to the body (except maybe a smallbacklash distance caused by the operation of the locking mechanism). Thefixed rotatable element can stop the jaws from moving, e.g., the jawsare not movable toward each other for clamping.

When the top part is unlocked with the bottom part (FIG. 54B(b)), therotatable element 5430 is free to move with respect to the body of theclamping device. Thus the top part can move away from the bottom part.The rotatable element can rotate in one direction when the pullingelement is pulled up. The rotation of the rotatable element in thisdirection can cause the jaws to move toward each other, for clamping onan object. The rotatable element can rotate in an opposite directionwhen the pulling element is released, due to the presence of a springconfiguration 5435. The rotation of the rotatable element in thisopposite direction can cause the jaws to move away from each other, forreleasing the object.

The locking mechanism can be automatically toggled due to a set ofvertical movements, which can include a lowering movement of the pullingelement, followed by a raising movement of the pulling element. The setof vertical movements can rotate a rod having a hook end, which can betoggled between hooked and unhooked to a mating hook receptacle.

What is claimed is:
 1. An automatic locking mechanism for a clampingdevice comprising a rotatable element rotatably coupled to a body, theautomatic locking mechanism comprising a lockable element; and areceptacle comprising a path configured to confine a portion of thelockable element for running along the path, wherein one selected from agroup consisting of the lockable element and the receptacle is coupledto the rotatable element, and the other selected from the groupconsisting of the lockable element and the receptacle is coupled to thebody, wherein the path comprises at least two turns, wherein a firstturn of the at least two turns is configured to prevent the lockableelement, when moving in the path, relative to the receptacle, toward thefirst turn in a first direction, from continuing moving in the samefirst direction, wherein when the lockable element is prevented frommoving in the first direction, the rotatable element is configured to benot rotatable when the clamping device is lifted up, wherein a secondturn of the at least two turns is configured to prevent the lockableelement, when moving in the path, relative to the receptacle, from thefirst turn toward the second turn in a second direction different fromthe first direction, from continuing moving in the same seconddirection.
 2. An automatic locking mechanism as in claim 1, wherein thefirst and second turns are abrupt turns.
 3. An automatic lockingmechanism as in claim 1, wherein the path comprises a zigzag shape,wherein the lockable element comprises a rod portion configured to fitin the zigzag path.
 4. An automatic locking mechanism as in claim 1,further comprising a spring mechanism to bias the lockable element in adirection from a first turn toward a second turn, a one way valvecoupled to a first end of the path to allow the lockable element to exitthe path and to prevent the lockable element from entering the path atthe first end.
 5. An automatic locking mechanism as in claim 1, whereinthe second turn is configured to guide the lockable element, when movingin the path, relative to the receptacle, from the first turn toward thesecond turn in the second direction, to move in the first direction. 6.An automatic locking mechanism as in claim 1, further comprising whereinwhen the lockable element moves, relative to the receptacle, pass thesecond turn, the rotatable element is configured to be rotatable whenthe clamping device is lifted up.
 7. An automatic locking mechanism asin claim 1, wherein the lockable element is coupled to the body, whereinthe path is formed on the rotatable element, wherein the lockableelement moving in the path relative to the receptacle toward the firstturn comprises the path rotating due to the rotation of the rotatableelement with the lockable element fixedly coupled to the body.
 8. Anautomatic locking mechanism as in claim 1, wherein the lockable elementis coupled to the rotatable element, wherein the path is formed on thebody, wherein the lockable element moving in the path relative to thereceptacle toward the first turn comprises the lockable element rotatingdue to the rotation of the rotatable element with the path fixedlycoupled to the body.
 9. An automatic locking mechanism as in claim 1,wherein the lockable element is coupled to the body, wherein the path isformed on the rotatable element, wherein the first turn is configured toprevent the rotatable element, when the path is moved to position thelockable element toward the first, from continuing moving in a samedirection, wherein the second turn is configured to prevent therotatable element, when the path is moved to position the lockableelement from the first turn toward the second turn, from continuingmoving in a same direction.
 10. An automatic locking mechanism as inclaim 1, wherein the lockable element is coupled to the rotatableelement, wherein the path is formed on the body, wherein the first turnis configured to prevent the lockable element, when moving in the pathtoward the first turn, from continuing moving in a same direction,wherein the second turn is configured to prevent the lockable element,when moving in the path from the first turn toward the second turn, fromcontinuing moving in a same direction.
 11. An automatic lockingmechanism as in claim 1, wherein the lockable element is coupled to thebody, wherein the path is formed on the rotatable element, wherein thepath comprises an entrance and an exit, wherein the first turn isdisposed nearer the entrance and a second turn is disposed nearer theexit, wherein the path is configured so that when the entrance is in avicinity of the lockable element and the rotatable element rotates in athird direction, the entrance rotates past the lockable element, whereinwhen the entrance is past the lockable element in the third directionand the rotatable element rotates in a direction opposite the thirddirection, the path is configured to accept the lockable element intothe entrance and stops at the first turn, wherein when the lockableelement is at the first turn, the rotatable element is prevented fromfurther rotating in the direction opposite the third direction, whereinthe path is configured so that when the lockable element is at the firstturn and the rotatable element rotates in the third direction, the pathis configured to guide the lockable element toward the second turn,wherein when the lockable element is at the second turn and therotatable element rotates in the direction opposite the third direction,the path is configured to guide the lockable element toward the exit,wherein when the lockable element is at the exit, the rotatable elementis configured for further rotating in the direction opposite the thirddirection.
 12. An automatic locking mechanism as in claim 1, wherein thelockable element is coupled to the rotatable element, wherein the pathis formed on the body, wherein the path comprises an entrance and anexit, wherein the first turn is disposed nearer the entrance and asecond turn is disposed nearer the exit, wherein the path is configuredso that when the entrance is in a vicinity of the lockable element andthe rotatable element rotates in a third direction, the lockable elementrotates past the entrance, wherein when the lockable element is past theentrance in the third direction and the rotatable element rotates in adirection opposite the third direction, the lockable element isconfigured to enter into the entrance and stops at the first turn,wherein when the lockable element is at the first turn, the rotatableelement is prevented from further rotating in the direction opposite thethird direction, wherein the path is configured so that when thelockable element is at the first turn and the rotatable element rotatesin the third direction, the lockable element is guided along the path tomove toward the second turn, wherein when the lockable element is at thesecond turn and the rotatable element rotates in the direction oppositethe third direction, the lockable element is guided along the path tomove toward the exit, wherein when the lockable element is at the exit,the rotatable element is configured for further rotating in thedirection opposite the third direction.
 13. A clamping device comprisinga first jaw; a second jaw facing the first jaw; a first mechanismcoupled to the second jaw, wherein the first mechanism comprises arotatable element configured to be rotatable around a center ofrotation, wherein the first mechanism is configured for moving thesecond jaw toward the first jaw when the rotatable element rotates in afirst direction; a cable, wherein the cable comprises a first end,wherein the cable comprises a second end coupled to the first mechanism,wherein the cable is configured to rotate the rotatable element in thefirst direction when the first end moves away from the rotatableelement; an automatic locking mechanism coupling between a body of theclamping device and the rotatable element, wherein the automatic lockingmechanism configured to toggle the rotatable element between a rotatableconfiguration and a non-rotatable configuration, wherein in therotatable configuration, the rotatable element is free to rotate,wherein in the non-rotatable configuration, the rotatable element isprevented from rotate in a direction to move the second jaw toward thefirst jaw.
 14. A clamping device as in claim 13, wherein the automaticlocking mechanism comprises a lockable element and a receptaclecomprising a path configured to confine a portion of the lockableelement for running along the path, wherein the path is configured toprevent the rotatable element from continuing rotate in the firstdirection when the clamping device is lifted up after delivering aclamped object, wherein the path is configured to allow the rotatableelement to continuing rotate in the first direction when the clampingdevice is lifted up after clamping on an object.
 15. A clamping deviceas in claim 13, wherein the automatic locking mechanism comprises alockable element and a receptacle comprising a path configured toconfine a portion of the lockable element for running along the path,wherein the path comprises at least two turns, wherein the automaticlocking mechanism comprises a spring mechanism to bias the lockableelement in a direction from a first turn of the at least two turnstoward a second turn of the at least two turns, wherein the automaticlocking mechanism comprises a one way valve coupled to a first end ofthe path to allow the lockable element to exit the path and to preventthe lockable element from entering the path at the first end.
 16. Aclamping device as in claim 13, wherein the lockable element is coupledto the body, wherein the path is formed on the rotatable element,wherein the first turn is configured to prevent the rotatable element,when the path is moved to position the lockable element toward thefirst, from continuing moving in a same direction, wherein the secondturn is configured to prevent the rotatable element, when the path ismoved to position the lockable element from the first turn toward thesecond turn, from continuing moving in a same direction.
 17. A clampingdevice as in claim 13, wherein the lockable element is coupled to therotatable element, wherein the path is formed on the body, wherein thefirst turn is configured to prevent the lockable element, when moving inthe path toward the first turn, from continuing moving in a samedirection, wherein the second turn is configured to prevent the lockableelement, when moving in the path from the first turn toward the secondturn, from continuing moving in a same direction.
 18. An automaticlocking mechanism as in claim 13, wherein the lockable element iscoupled to the body, wherein the path is formed on the rotatableelement, wherein the path comprises an entrance and an exit, wherein thefirst turn is disposed nearer the entrance and a second turn is disposednearer the exit, wherein the path is configured so that when theentrance is in a vicinity of the lockable element and the rotatableelement rotates in a second direction, the entrance rotates past thelockable element, wherein when the entrance is past the lockable elementin the second direction and the rotatable element rotates in a directionopposite the second direction, the path is configured to accept thelockable element into the entrance and stops at the first turn, whereinwhen the lockable element is at the first turn, the rotatable element isprevented from further rotating in the direction opposite the seconddirection, wherein the path is configured so that when the lockableelement is at the first turn and the rotatable element rotates in thesecond direction, the path is configured to guide the lockable elementtoward the second turn, wherein when the lockable element is at thesecond turn and the rotatable element rotates in the direction oppositethe second direction, the path is configured to guide the lockableelement toward the exit, wherein when the lockable element is at theexit, the rotatable element is configured for further rotating in thedirection opposite the second direction.
 19. An automatic lockingmechanism as in claim 13, wherein the lockable element is coupled to therotatable element, wherein the path is formed on the body, wherein thepath comprises an entrance and an exit, wherein the first turn isdisposed nearer the entrance and a second turn is disposed nearer theexit, wherein the path is configured so that when the entrance is in avicinity of the lockable element and the rotatable element rotates in asecond direction, the lockable element rotates past the entrance,wherein when the lockable element is past the entrance in the seconddirection and the rotatable element rotates in a direction opposite thesecond direction, the lockable element is configured to enter into theentrance and stops at the first turn, wherein when the lockable elementis at the first turn, the rotatable element is prevented from furtherrotating in the direction opposite the second direction, wherein thepath is configured so that when the lockable element is at the firstturn and the rotatable element rotates in the second direction, thelockable element is guided along the path to move toward the secondturn, wherein when the lockable element is at the second turn and therotatable element rotates in the direction opposite the seconddirection, the lockable element is guided along the path to move towardthe exit, wherein when the lockable element is at the exit, therotatable element is configured for further rotating in the directionopposite the second direction.
 20. A method for automatic clamping of aclamping device, wherein the clamping device comprises two jawsconfigured to clamp on an object, wherein the clamping device comprisesa rotatable element coupled to a jaw of the two jaws for moving the jawtoward or away from the other jaw, wherein the clamping device comprisesa cable with one end coupled to the rotatable element, wherein theclamping device comprises an automatic locking mechanism configured totoggle the rotatable element between a rotatable configuration and anon-rotatable configuration, wherein in the rotatable configuration, therotatable element is free to rotate, wherein in the non-rotatableconfiguration, the rotatable element is prevented from moving in a firstdirection to move the jaw toward the other jaw, the method comprisinglowering the cable to a ground, wherein the clamping device clamps on anobject, after the object touches the ground, lowering the cable furtheruntil the automatic locking mechanism coupled to the clamping device ispartially activated, wherein a spring mechanism coupled to the rotatableelement acts to rotate the rotatable element in a second directionopposite to the first direction to separate the two jaws to loosen agrip on the object, raising the cable up to rotate the rotatable elementin the first direction to complete the activation of the automaticlocking mechanism, wherein the activation of the automatic lockingmechanism prevents the rotatable element from rotating further in thefirst direction, continuing raising the cable up to raise the clampingdevice, wherein the jaws of the clamping device remain open due to thenon-rotatable configuration of the rotatable element, leaving the objecton the ground.